FCC ID: I88AMG1312T10B Wireless N ADSL2+ 4-port Gateway with USB

AMG1312-T Series Wireless N ADSL2+ 4-port Gateway with USB Version 2.00 Edition 1, 8/2013 Quick Start Guide Users Guide Default Login Details LAN IP Address User Name Password www.zyxel.com http://192.168.1.1 admin 1234 Copyright 2013 ZyXEL Communications Corporation IMPORTANT!

READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE. KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. Note: This guide is a reference for a series of products. Therefore some features or options in this guide may not be available in your product. Graphics in this book may differ slightly from the product due to differences in operating systems, operating system versions, or if you installed updated firmware/software for your device. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide shows how to connect the AMG1312-T Series and access the Web Configurator. It contains information on setting up your wireless network. 2 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Users Guide .......................................................................................................................................12 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................14 Introducing the Web Configurator ...........................................................................................................19 Internet / Wireless Setup Wizard............................................................................................................. 27 Tutorials ..................................................................................................................................................34 Technical Reference ..........................................................................................................................61 Connection Status and System Info Screens ..........................................................................................63 Broadband ...............................................................................................................................................68 Wireless LAN ..........................................................................................................................................87 Home Networking .................................................................................................................................. 115 Static Route ...........................................................................................................................................132 Quality of Service (QoS) .......................................................................................................................136 Network Address Translation (NAT) ......................................................................................................147 Port Binding ...........................................................................................................................................157 Dynamic DNS Setup .............................................................................................................................161 Filters ....................................................................................................................................................163 Firewall ..................................................................................................................................................168 Parental Control ....................................................................................................................................186 Certificate ..............................................................................................................................................189 Logs .....................................................................................................................................................194 Traffic Status .........................................................................................................................................196 User Account .........................................................................................................................................199 TR-069 Client ........................................................................................................................................200 System Settings ....................................................................................................................................202 Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................................................................205 Backup/Restore .....................................................................................................................................207 Remote Management ............................................................................................................................210 Diagnostic .............................................................................................................................................221 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................224 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 3 Table of Contents Table of Contents Contents Overview ..............................................................................................................................3 Table of Contents .................................................................................................................................4 Part I: Users Guide ......................................................................................... 12 Chapter 1 Introduction.........................................................................................................................................14 1.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................14 1.2 Ways to Manage the AMG1312-T Series .........................................................................................14 1.3 Good Habits for Managing the AMG1312-T Series ..........................................................................14 1.4 Applications for the AMG1312-T Series ............................................................................................15 1.4.1 Internet Access ........................................................................................................................15 1.4.2 Wireless Access ......................................................................................................................15 1.5 General Hardware Features ..............................................................................................................16 1.6 Using the WPS Button ......................................................................................................................17 1.7 The RESET Button ............................................................................................................................18 1.7.1 Using the Reset Button ............................................................................................................18 1.8 Ways to Manage the AMG1312-T Series ........................................................................................18 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator ....................................................................................................19 2.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................19 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator .............................................................................................19 2.2 The Web Configurator Layout ...........................................................................................................22 2.2.1 Title Bar ...................................................................................................................................23 2.2.2 Main Window ...........................................................................................................................24 2.2.3 Navigation Panel .....................................................................................................................24 Chapter 3 Internet / Wireless Setup Wizard .......................................................................................................27 3.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................27 3.2 Internet / Wireless Wizard Setup .......................................................................................................27 Chapter 4 Tutorials...............................................................................................................................................34 4.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................34 4.2 Setting Up Your DSL Connection ......................................................................................................34 4 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Table of Contents 4.3 IPv6 Address Configuration ..............................................................................................................36 4.4 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network .............................................................................................37 4.4.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings .............................................................................37 4.4.2 Using WPS ..............................................................................................................................38 4.4.3 Connecting Wirelessly to your AMG1312-T Series .................................................................42 4.5 Configuring the MAC Address Filter for Restricting Wireless Internet Access ..................................44 4.6 Setting Up NAT Forwarding for a Game Server ................................................................................45 4.6.1 Port Forwarding .......................................................................................................................46 4.7 Configuring Firewall Rules to Allow a Specified Service ...................................................................47 4.8 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network .................................................................50 4.9 Port Binding Configuration ...............................................................................................................52 4.9.1 Configuring ATM QoS for Multiple WAN Connections .............................................................52 4.9.2 Configuring Port Binding ..........................................................................................................55 4.10 Configuring QoS to Prioritize Traffic ................................................................................................56 4.11 Access the AMG1312-T Series from the Internet Using DDNS ......................................................59 4.11.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org ................................................................59 4.11.2 Configuring DDNS on Your AMG1312-T Series ....................................................................60 4.11.3 Testing the DDNS Setting ......................................................................................................60 Part II: Technical Reference............................................................................ 61 Chapter 5 Connection Status and System Info Screens ..................................................................................63 5.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................63 5.2 The Connection Status Screen .........................................................................................................63 5.3 The System Info Screen ....................................................................................................................64 Chapter 6 Broadband...........................................................................................................................................68 6.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................68 6.1.1 What You Can Do in the WAN Screens ...................................................................................68 6.1.2 What You Need to Know About WAN ......................................................................................68 6.1.3 Before You Begin .....................................................................................................................69 6.2 The Internet Connection Screen .......................................................................................................69 6.2.1 Advanced Setup ......................................................................................................................73 6.3 The More Connections Screen .........................................................................................................75 6.3.1 More Connections Edit ............................................................................................................76 6.3.2 Configuring More Connections Advanced Setup .....................................................................79 6.4 The 3G Backup Screen .....................................................................................................................80 6.5 WAN Technical Reference ................................................................................................................82 6.5.1 Encapsulation ..........................................................................................................................82 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 5 Table of Contents 6.5.2 Multiplexing ..............................................................................................................................83 6.5.3 VPI and VCI .............................................................................................................................84 6.5.4 IP Address Assignment ...........................................................................................................84 6.5.5 Nailed-Up Connection (PPP) ...................................................................................................84 6.5.6 NAT ..........................................................................................................................................85 6.6 Traffic Shaping ..................................................................................................................................85 6.6.1 ATM Traffic Classes .................................................................................................................86 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN.......................................................................................................................................87 7.1 Overview ...........................................................................................................................................87 7.1.1 What You Can Do in the Wireless LAN Screens .....................................................................87 7.1.2 What You Need to Know About Wireless ................................................................................88 7.1.3 Before You Start .......................................................................................................................88 7.2 The General Screen ..........................................................................................................................88 7.2.1 No Security ..............................................................................................................................90 7.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption) ..........................................................................................................90 7.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) ....................................................................................................91 7.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication .............................................................................................................92 7.3 The More/Guest AP Screen ..............................................................................................................94 7.3.1 More AP Edit ...........................................................................................................................94 7.4 The MAC Authentication Screen .......................................................................................................96 7.5 The WPS Screen ..............................................................................................................................97 7.6 The WDS Screen ..............................................................................................................................99 7.7 The WMM Screen ...........................................................................................................................100 7.8 The Scheduling Screen ...................................................................................................................100 7.9 The Advanced Screen .....................................................................................................................101 7.10 Wireless LAN Technical Reference ...............................................................................................102 7.10.1 Wireless Network Overview .................................................................................................102 7.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms ...................................................................................................104 7.10.3 Wireless Security Overview .................................................................................................104 7.10.4 Signal Problems ..................................................................................................................106 7.10.5 BSS .....................................................................................................................................107 7.10.6 MBSSID ...............................................................................................................................107 7.10.7 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) ...................................................................................108 7.10.8 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) ...............................................................................................108 Chapter 8 Home Networking ............................................................................................................................. 115 8.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 115 8.1.1 What You Can Do in the LAN Screens .................................................................................. 115 8.1.2 What You Need To Know ....................................................................................................... 116 8.1.3 Before You Begin ................................................................................................................... 117 6 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Table of Contents 8.2 The LAN Setup Screen ................................................................................................................... 117 8.3 The Static DHCP Screen ................................................................................................................. 119 8.4 The IP Alias Screen ........................................................................................................................120 8.4.1 Configuring the LAN IP Alias Screen .....................................................................................121 8.5 The UPnP Screen ...........................................................................................................................121 8.6 The IPv6 LAN Setup Screen ...........................................................................................................122 8.7 The File Sharing Screen .................................................................................................................125 8.7.1 The User Edit Screen ............................................................................................................126 8.8 Home Networking Technical Reference ..........................................................................................128 8.8.1 LANs, WANs and the AMG1312-T Series .............................................................................128 8.8.2 DHCP Setup ..........................................................................................................................128 8.8.3 DNS Server Addresses .........................................................................................................128 8.8.4 LAN TCP/IP ...........................................................................................................................129 8.8.5 RIP Setup ..............................................................................................................................130 8.8.6 Multicast ................................................................................................................................130 Chapter 9 Static Route.......................................................................................................................................132 9.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................132 9.1.1 What You Can Do in the Static Route Screens ......................................................................133 9.2 The Static Route Screen .................................................................................................................133 9.2.1 Static Route Add/Edit ...........................................................................................................133 9.3 IPv6 Static Route .............................................................................................................................134 9.3.1 IPv6 Static Route Edit ..........................................................................................................135 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)...................................................................................................................136 10.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................136 10.1.1 What You Can Do in the QoS Screens ................................................................................136 10.1.2 What You Need to Know About QoS ...................................................................................137 10.2 The Quality of Service General Screen .........................................................................................137 10.3 The Queue Screen ........................................................................................................................138 10.3.1 Adding a QoS Queue .........................................................................................................139 10.4 The Class Setup Screen ..............................................................................................................140 10.4.1 Class Setup Add/Edit ...........................................................................................................140 10.5 The QoS Game List Screen .........................................................................................................144 10.6 QoS Technical Reference .............................................................................................................145 10.6.1 IEEE 802.1p ........................................................................................................................145 10.6.2 IP Precedence .....................................................................................................................145 10.6.3 Automatic Priority Queue Assignment .................................................................................146 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT)................................................................................................147 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 7 Table of Contents 11.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................147 11.1.1 What You Can Do in the NAT Screens ................................................................................147 11.1.2 What You Need To Know About NAT ...................................................................................147 11.2 The NAT General Screen ..............................................................................................................148 11.3 The Port Forwarding Screen .........................................................................................................149 11.3.1 Configuring the Port Forwarding Screen ..............................................................................149 11.3.2 Port Forwarding Rule Add/Edit ............................................................................................150 11.4 The DMZ Screen ...........................................................................................................................152 11.5 The ALG Screen ............................................................................................................................152 11.6 NAT Technical Reference ..............................................................................................................153 11.6.1 NAT Definitions ....................................................................................................................153 11.6.2 What NAT Does ...................................................................................................................154 11.6.3 How NAT Works ...................................................................................................................154 11.6.4 NAT Application ...................................................................................................................154 11.6.5 NAT Mapping Types .............................................................................................................155 Chapter 12 Port Binding ......................................................................................................................................157 12.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................157 12.1.1 What You Can Do in the Port Binding Screens ...................................................................158 12.2 The Port Binding General Screen .................................................................................................158 12.3 The Port Binding Screen ...............................................................................................................158 12.3.1 Port Binding Summary Screen ............................................................................................159 Chapter 13 Dynamic DNS Setup .........................................................................................................................161 13.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................161 13.1.1 What You Can Do in the DDNS Screen ...............................................................................161 13.1.2 What You Need To Know About DDNS ...............................................................................161 13.2 The Dynamic DNS Screen ............................................................................................................161 Chapter 14 Filters .................................................................................................................................................163 14.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................163 14.1.1 What You Can Do in the Filter Screens ...............................................................................163 14.1.2 What You Need to Know About Filtering .............................................................................163 14.2 The IP/MAC Filter Screen .............................................................................................................163 14.3 IPv6/MAC Filter .............................................................................................................................166 Chapter 15 Firewall ..............................................................................................................................................168 15.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................168 15.1.1 What You Can Do in the Firewall Screens ...........................................................................168 8 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Table of Contents 15.1.2 What You Need to Know About Firewall ..............................................................................169 15.2 The Firewall General Screen ........................................................................................................170 15.3 The Default Action Screen ............................................................................................................171 15.4 The Rules Screen .........................................................................................................................173 15.4.1 The Rules Add Screen ........................................................................................................174 15.4.2 Customized Services ..........................................................................................................176 15.4.3 Customized Service Add/Edit .............................................................................................177 15.5 The DoS Screen ............................................................................................................................179 15.5.1 The DoS Advanced Screen .................................................................................................179 15.5.2 Configuring Firewall Thresholds ..........................................................................................180 15.6 Firewall Technical Reference ........................................................................................................181 15.6.1 Firewall Rules Overview ......................................................................................................181 15.6.2 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall .......................................................182 15.6.3 Security Considerations .......................................................................................................183 15.6.4 Triangle Route .....................................................................................................................183 Chapter 16 Parental Control................................................................................................................................186 16.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................186 16.2 The Parental Control Screen .........................................................................................................186 16.2.1 Add/Edit Parental Control Rule ............................................................................................187 Chapter 17 Certificate ..........................................................................................................................................189 17.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................189 17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................189 17.2 What You Need to Know ...............................................................................................................189 17.3 Local Certificates ...........................................................................................................................189 17.4 The Trusted CA Screen ................................................................................................................191 17.5 Trusted CA Import .......................................................................................................................191 17.6 View Certificate .............................................................................................................................192 Chapter 18 Logs ..................................................................................................................................................194 18.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................194 18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................194 18.1.2 What You Need To Know .....................................................................................................194 18.2 The System Log Screen ................................................................................................................195 Chapter 19 Traffic Status .....................................................................................................................................196 19.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................196 19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter ........................................................................................196 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 9 Table of Contents 19.2 The WAN Status Screen ...............................................................................................................196 19.3 The LAN Status Screen .................................................................................................................197 19.4 The NAT Screen ............................................................................................................................198 Chapter 20 User Account ....................................................................................................................................199 20.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................199 20.2 The User Account Screen .............................................................................................................199 Chapter 21 TR-069 Client.....................................................................................................................................200 21.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................200 21.2 The TR-069 Client Screen ............................................................................................................200 Chapter 22 System Settings................................................................................................................................202 22.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................202 22.1.1 What You Can Do in the System Settings Screens .............................................................202 22.2 The System Screen .......................................................................................................................202 22.3 The Time Screen ..........................................................................................................................202 Chapter 23 Firmware Upgrade ............................................................................................................................205 23.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................205 23.2 The Firmware Screen ....................................................................................................................205 Chapter 24 Backup/Restore ................................................................................................................................207 24.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................207 24.2 The Backup/Restore Screen .........................................................................................................207 24.3 The Reboot Screen .......................................................................................................................209 Chapter 25 Remote Management........................................................................................................................210 25.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................210 25.1.1 What You Can Do in the Remote Management Screens ....................................................210 25.1.2 What You Need to Know About Remote Management ........................................................ 211 25.2 The WWW Screen ........................................................................................................................ 211 25.2.1 Configuring the WWW Screen .............................................................................................211 25.3 The Telnet Screen .........................................................................................................................213 25.4 The FTP Screen ............................................................................................................................213 25.5 The SNMP Screen ........................................................................................................................214 25.5.1 Configuring SNMP ...............................................................................................................215 10 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Table of Contents 25.6 The DNS Screen ..........................................................................................................................217 25.7 The ICMP Screen ..........................................................................................................................217 25.8 The SSH Screen ...........................................................................................................................218 25.8.1 SSH Example ......................................................................................................................219 Chapter 26 Diagnostic .........................................................................................................................................221 26.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................221 26.1.1 What You Can Do in the Diagnostic Screens ......................................................................221 26.2 The General Screen ......................................................................................................................221 26.3 The DSL Line Screen ....................................................................................................................222 Chapter 27 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................224 27.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs ....................................................................................224 27.2 AMG1312-T Series Access and Login ..........................................................................................225 27.3 Internet Access .............................................................................................................................227 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address.......................................................................229 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting.......................................................................................249 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions .................................................257 Appendix D Wireless LANs..............................................................................................................264 Appendix E IPv6 ..............................................................................................................................277 Appendix F Services........................................................................................................................286 Appendix G Legal Information .........................................................................................................290 Index ..................................................................................................................................................294 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 11 PART I Users Guide 12 13 CHAPTER 1 Introduction 1.1 Overview The AMG1312-T Series is an ADSL2+ router. By integrating DSL and NAT, you are provided with ease of installation and high-speed, shared Internet access. The AMG1312-T Series is also a complete security solution with a robust firewall and content filtering. Only use firmware for your AMG1312-T Seriess specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your AMG1312-T Series. Note: Not all models have all of the features shown in this Users Guide. 1.2 Ways to Manage the AMG1312-T Series Use any of the following methods to manage the AMG1312-T Series. Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the AMG1312-T Series using a (supported) web browser. Command Line Interface. Line commands are mostly used for troubleshooting by service engineers. FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore. TR-069. This is an auto-configuration server used to remotely configure your device. 1.3 Good Habits for Managing the AMG1312-T Series Do the following things regularly to make the AMG1312-T Series more secure and to manage the AMG1312-T Series more effectively. Change the password. Use a password thats not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters. Write down the password and put it in a safe place. Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it). Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the AMG1312-T Series to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the AMG1312-T Series. You could simply restore your last configuration. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 14 Chapter 1 Introduction 1.4 Applications for the AMG1312-T Series Here are some example uses for which the AMG1312-T Series is well suited. 1.4.1 Internet Access Your AMG1312-T Series provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack. Computers can connect to the AMG1312-T Seriess Ethernet ports (or wirelessly). Figure 1 AMG1312-T Seriess Router Features LAN WAN DSL You can also configure firewall and filtering feature on the AMG1312-T Series for secure Internet access. When the firewall is on, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked unless it is initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely browse the Internet and download files. Use the filtering feature to block access to specific web sites or Internet applications such as MSN or Yahoo Messenger. You can also configure IP/MAC filtering rules for incoming or outgoing traffic. Use QoS to efficiently manage traffic on your network by giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular computers. For example, you could make sure that the AMG1312-T Series gives voice over Internet calls high priority, and/or limit bandwidth devoted to the bosss excessive file downloading. 1.4.2 Wireless Access The ZyXEL Device is a wireless Access Point (AP) for IEEE 802.11b/g/n compliant clients, such as notebook computers or PDAs and iPads. It allows them to connect to the Internet without having to rely on inconvenient Ethernet cables. You can set up a wireless network with WPS (WiFi Protected Setup) or manually add a client to your wireless network. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 15 Chapter 1 Introduction Figure 2 Wireless Access Example 1.5 General Hardware Features Figure 3 General Hardware Features The following table describes the LEDs. Table 1 LED Descriptions LED COLOR Green

(POWER) Red Ethernet 1-4 Green STATUS On Blinking On Off On Blinking Off DESCRIPTION The AMG1312-T Series is receiving power and ready for use. The AMG1312-T Series is self-testing. The AMG1312-T Series detected an error while self-testing, or there is a device malfunction. The AMG1312-T Series is not receiving power. The AMG1312-T Series has an Ethernet connection with a device on the Local Area Network (LAN). The AMG1312-T Series is sending/receiving data to/from the LAN. The AMG1312-T Series does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN. 16 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Table 1 LED Descriptions (continued) LED COLOR Green

(WLAN)

(WPS)

(DSL)

(INTERNET) USB Green Green Green Red Green Chapter 1 Introduction DESCRIPTION The wireless network is activated. The AMG1312-T Series is communicating with wireless clients. The wireless network is not activated. WPS is ready. The AMG1312-T Series is setting up a WPS connection. WPS is disabled or has failed. The DSL line is up. The AMG1312-T Series is initializing the DSL line. The DSL line is down. The AMG1312-T Series has an IP connection but no traffic. Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a DHCP server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used) and the DSL connection is up. The AMG1312-T Series is sending or receiving IP traffic. The AMG1312-T Series attempted to make an IP connection but failed. Possible causes are no response from a DHCP server, no PPPoE response, PPPoE authentication failed. The AMG1312-T Series does not have an IP connection. The AMG1312-T Series recognizes a USB connection through the USB slot. The AMG1312-T Series is sending/receiving data to /from the USB device connected to it. The AMG1312-T Series does not detect a USB connection through the USB slot. STATUS On Blinking Off On Blinking Off On Blinking Off On Blinking On Off On Blinking Off 1.6 Using the WPS Button You can also use the WPS button to quickly set up a secure wireless connection between the AMG1312-T Series and a WPS-compatible client by adding one device at a time. To activate WPS:

1 Make sure the POWER LED is on and not blinking. 2 Press the WPS button for 1-5 seconds and release it. See below for WPS button location. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 17 Chapter 1 Introduction 3 Press the WPS button on another WPS-enabled device within range of the AMG1312-T Series. The WPS LED should flash while the AMG1312-T Series sets up a WPS connection with the other wireless device. 4 Once the connection is successfully made, the WPS LED shines green. WPS 1.7 The RESET Button If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the user name and password will be reset to the default. 1.7.1 Using the Reset Button 1 Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking). 2 To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it. When the POWER LED begins to blink, the defaults have been restored and the device restarts. 1.8 Ways to Manage the AMG1312-T Series Use any of the following methods to manage the AMG1312-T Series. Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the AMG1312-T Series using a (supported) web browser. FTP for firmware upgrades and configuration backup/restore. 18 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide CHAPTER 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2.1 Overview The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy device setup and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later versions, Mozilla Firefox 3 and later versions, or Safari 2.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels. In order to use the web configurator, you need to allow:

Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2. JavaScript (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). See Appendix C on page 257 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed in Internet Explorer. 2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator 1 Make sure your AMG1312-T Series hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick Start Guide). 2 3 4 Launch your web browser. Type "192.168.1.1" as the URL. A password screen displays. Type admin (default) as the username and 1234 as the password, and click Login. If you have changed the password, enter your password and click Login. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 19 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Figure 4 Password Screen Note: For security reasons, the AMG1312-T Series automatically logs you out if you do not use the web configurator for five minutes (default). If this happens, log in again. 5 The following screen displays if you have not yet changed your password. It is strongly recommended you change the default password. Enter a new password, retype it to confirm and click Apply; alternatively click Skip to proceed to the Connection Status screen if you do not want to change the password now. Figure 5 Change Password Screen 6 The Connection Status screen appears. 20 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 6 Connection Status Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 7 Click System Info to display the System Info screen, where you can view the AMG1312-T Seriess interface and system information. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 21 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2.2 The Web Configurator Layout Click Connection Status > System Info to show the following screen. Figure 7 Web Configurator Layout Screen A B C As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:

A - title bar B - main window C - navigation panel 22 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2.2.1 Title Bar The title bar shows the following icon in the upper right corner. Click this icon to log out of the web configurator. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 23 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 2.2.2 Main Window The main window displays information and configuration fields. It is discussed in the rest of this document. After you click System Info on the Connection Status screen, the System Info screen is displayed. See Chapter 5 on page 64 for more information about the System Info screen. If you click LAN Device on the System Info screen, the Connection Status screen appears. See Chapter 5 on page 63 for more information about the Connection Status screen. If you click Virtual Device on the System Info screen, a visual graphic appears, showing the connection status of the AMG1312-T Seriess ports. The connected ports are in color and disconnected ports are gray. 2.2.3 Navigation Panel Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure AMG1312-T Series features. The following table describes each menu item. Table 2 Navigation Panel Summary LINK Connection Status TAB FUNCTION This screen shows the network status of the AMG1312-T Series and computers/devices connected to it. Network Setting Broadband Wireless Use this screen to configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address Internet Connection assignment, DNS servers and other advanced properties. More Connections Use this screen to configure additional WAN connections. 3G Backup General Use this screen to configure 3G WAN connection. Use this screen to turn the wireless connection on or off, specify the SSID(s) and configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN authentication/security settings. Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the AMG1312-T Series. More/guest AP MAC Authentication WPS WDS WMM Scheduling Advanced Use this screen to block or allow wireless traffic from wireless devices of certain SSIDs and MAC addresses to the AMG1312-T Series. Use this screen to use WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) to establish a wireless connection. Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System (WDS) links to other access points. Use this screen to enable or disable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM). Use this screen to configure when the AMG1312-T Series enables or disables the wireless LAN. Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings such as output power. 24 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Table 2 Navigation Panel Summary (continued) LINK Home Networking Static Route QoS NAT Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator TAB LAN Setup Static DHCP IP Alias UPnP IPv6 LAN Setup File Sharing Static Route IPv6 Static Route General Queue Class Setup Game List General Port Forwarding DMZ FUNCTION Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP settings, and other advanced properties. Use this screen to assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses. Use this screen to partition your LAN interface into different logical networks. Use this screen to enable the UPnP function. Use this screen to configure the IPv6 settings on the AMG1312-T Seriess LAN interface. Use this screen to enable file sharing via the Device. Use this screen to view and set up static routes on the AMG1312-

T Series. Use this screen to configure IPv6 static routes. Use this screen to enable QoS and decide allowable bandwidth using QoS. Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment. Use this screen to set up classifiers to sort traffic into different flows and assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow. Use this screen to give priority to traffic for specific games. Use this screen to activate/deactivate NAT. Use this screen to make your local servers visible to the outside world. Use this screen to configure a default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding screen. Use this screen to enable or disable SIP ALG. Use this screen to activate/deactivate port binding. Use this screen to configure and view port binding groups. Use this screen to allow a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address. Port Binding Dynamic DNS ALG General Port Binding Dynamic DNS Security Filter Firewall IP/MAC Filter IPv6/MAC Filter General Default Action Rules Dos Use this screen to configure IPv4/MAC filtering rules for incoming or outgoing traffic. Use this screen to configure IPv6/MAC filtering rules for incoming or outgoing traffic. Use this screen to activate/deactivate the firewall. Use this screen to set the default action that the firewall takes on packets that do not match any of the firewall rules. Use this screen to view the configured firewall rules and add, edit or remove a firewall rule. Use this screen to set the thresholds that the AMG1312-T Series uses to determine when to start dropping sessions that are not fully established (half-open sessions). AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 25 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Table 2 Navigation Panel Summary (continued) LINK FUNCTION Parental Control TAB Parental Control Certificates Local Certificates Trusted CA System Monitor Log Log Traffic Status WAN LAN NAT Maintenance Users Account TR-069 Client Users Account TR-069 Client System System Time Time Setting Log Setting Log Setting Firmware Upgrade Backup/Restore Backup/Restore Reboot Reboot Remote MGMT Diagnostic WWW, Telnet, FTP, SNMP, DNS, ICMP, SSH Ping DSL Line Use this screen to define time periods and days during which the AMG1312-T Series performs parental control and/or block web sites with the specific URL. Use this screen to export self-signed certificates or certification requests and import the AMG1312-T Seriess CA-signed certificates. Use this screen to save CA certificates to the AMG1312-T Series. Use this screen to view the logs for the level that you selected. You can export or e-mail the logs. Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the WAN port of the AMG1312-T Series. Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the LAN ports of the AMG1312-T Series. Use this screen to view the status of NAT sessions on the AMG1312-T Series. Use this screen to configure the passwords your user accounts. Use this screen to configure the AMG1312-T Series to be managed by an Auto Configuration Server (ACS). Use this screen to configure management inactivity time-out setting. Use this screen to change your AMG1312-T Seriess time and date. Use this screen to select which logs and/or immediate alerts your device is to record. You can also set it to e-mail the logs to you. Use this screen to backup and restore your devices configuration

(settings) or reset the factory default settings. Use this screen to reboot the AMG1312-T Series without turning the power off. Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for specific network service. Use this screen to test the connections to other devices. Use this screen to identify problems with the DSL connection. Firmware Upgrade Use this screen to upload firmware to your device. 26 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide CHAPTER 3 Internet / Wireless Setup Wizard 3.1 Overview Use the wizard setup screens to configure your system for Internet access with the information given to you by your ISP. Note: See the advanced menu chapters for background information on these fields. 3.2 Internet / Wireless Wizard Setup 1 2 3 After you enter the password to access the web configurator, click the Wizard icon (

right corner of the web configurator to go to the Wizard.

) in the top Click INTERNET/WIRELESS SETUP to configure the system for Internet access and wireless connection. Select your Time Zone from the drop-down menu, and click Next. Figure 8 Wizard Welcome AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 27 Chapter 3 Internet / Wireless Setup Wizard Enter your Internet access information in the wizard screen exactly as your service provider gave it to you. Leave the defaults in any fields for which you were not given information. 4 Configure the field and click Next to continue. See Section 3.2 on page 27 for wireless connection wizard setup. Figure 9 Internet Access Wizard Setup: IPoA Configuration The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 3 Internet Access Wizard Setup: IPoA Configuration LABEL Encapsulation DESCRIPTION Select the encapsulation type your ISP uses from the Encapsulation drop-down list box: IPoA, ENET ENCAP, PPPoA, or PPPoE. Select the multiplexing method used by your ISP from the Multiplex drop-down list box either VC-based or LLC-based. Enter the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) assigned to you. This field may already be configured. Enter the Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) assigned to you. This field may already be configured. Enter the IP address of the AMG1312-T Series. Enter the default gateway of the ZyXEL Device. Enter the primary DNS server IP address for the AMG1312-T Series. Enter the secondary DNS server IP address for the AMG1312-T Series. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to continue to the next wizard screen. The next wizard screen you see depends on what protocol you chose above. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Multiplex VPI VCI IP Address Default Gateway Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Back Next Exit 28 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 3 Internet / Wireless Setup Wizard Note: Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) define a virtual circuit. Figure 10 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 4 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP LABEL Encapsulation DESCRIPTION Select the encapsulation type your ISP uses from the Encapsulation drop-down list box: IPoA, ENET ENCAP, PPPoA, or PPPoE. Select the multiplexing method used by your ISP from the Multiplex drop-down list box either VC-based or LLC-based. Enter the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) assigned to you. This field may already be configured. Enter the Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) assigned to you. This field may already be configured. Multiplex VPI VCI Select Yes to enter specific IP information from your Internet service provider. Enter your Internet access information exactly as your service provider gave it to you. IP Address Subnet Mask Enter the IP address of the AMG1312-T Series. Enter the subnet mask in dotted decimal notation. Default Gateway Refer to the appendix to calculate a subnet mask if you are implementing subnetting. You must specify a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP) when you use ENET ENCAP in the Encapsulation field in the previous screen. Enter the secondary DNS server IP address for the AMG1312-T Series. Primary DNS Server Enter the primary DNS server IP address for the AMG1312-T Series. Secondary DNS Server Back Apply Exit Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 29 Chapter 3 Internet / Wireless Setup Wizard Figure 11 Internet Connection with PPPoA The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 5 Internet Connection with PPPoA LABEL Encapsulation User Name Password Multiplex VPI VCI DESCRIPTION Select the encapsulation type your ISP uses from the Encapsulation drop-down list box: IPoA, ENET ENCAP, PPPoA, or PPPoE. Enter the login name that your ISP gives you. Enter the password associated with the user name above. Select the multiplexing method used by your ISP from the Multiplex drop-down list box either VC-based or LLC-based. Enter the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) assigned to you. This field may already be configured. Enter the Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) assigned to you. This field may already be configured. Enter the IP address of the AMG1312-T Series. IP Address Primary DNS Server Enter the primary DNS server IP address for the AMG1312-T Series. Secondary DNS Server Back Apply Exit Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Enter the secondary DNS server IP address for the AMG1312-T Series. 30 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 12 Internet Connection with PPPoE Chapter 3 Internet / Wireless Setup Wizard The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 6 Internet Connection with PPPoE LABEL User Name DESCRIPTION Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given. Enter the password associated with the user name above. Select the multiplexing method used by your ISP from the Multiplex drop-down list box either VC-based or LLC-based. Enter the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) assigned to you. This field may already be configured. Enter the Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) assigned to you. This field may already be configured. Password Multiplex VPI VCI Enter the IP address of the AMG1312-T Series. Enter the primary DNS server IP address for the AMG1312-T Series. Select Yes to enter specific IP information from your Internet service provider. Enter your Internet access information exactly as your service provider gave it to you. IP Address Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Back Apply Exit Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Enter the secondary DNS server IP address for the AMG1312-T Series. If the user name and/or password you entered for PPPoE or PPPoA connection are not correct, you are prompted to enter the correct information. If the Internet connection fails, check to see if your account is activated. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 31 Chapter 3 Internet / Wireless Setup Wizard After you configure the Internet access information, use the following screen to set up your wireless LAN. Check the Wireless Service box to enable wireless connection on the ZyXEL device. Configure your wireless settings in this screen. Click Next. Figure 13 Wireless Setup 5 6 The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 7 Wireless Setup LABEL Wireless Service Wireless Network Name(SSID) DESCRIPTION Click this to enable or disable wireless service on the ZyXEL device. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 printable 7-bit ASCII characters) for the wireless LAN. If you change this field on the AMG1312-T Series, make sure all wireless stations use the same SSID in order to access the network. The range of radio frequencies used by IEEE 802.11b/g wireless devices is called a channel. Select a channel ID that is not already in use by a neighboring device. Displays the security setting. To mofidy, see Section 7.2 on page 88. Enter a set of characters (8 to 63 characters or 64 hexadecimal digits [a-f, A-F, and 0-9]) for the shared security key. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to continue to the next wizard screen. Click this to close the wizard screen without saving. Channel Selection Security Pre-Shared Key Back Next Exit Note: The wireless stations and AMG1312-T Series must use the same SSID and channel ID for wireless communication. 7 The configuration settings are saved and applied. Click Close to complete the Internet / Wireless setup. 32 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 14 Results Summary Chapter 3 Internet / Wireless Setup Wizard 8 Launch your web browser and navigate to www.zyxel.com. Internet access is just the beginning. Refer to the rest of this guide for more detailed information on the complete range of AMG1312-T Series features. If you cannot access the Internet, open the web configurator again to confirm that the Internet settings you configured in the wizard setup are correct. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 33 CHAPTER 4 Tutorials 4.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to use the AMG1312-T Seriess various features. Setting Up Your DSL Connection, see page 34 IPv6 Address Configuration, see page 36 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network, see page 37 Configuring the MAC Address Filter for Restricting Wireless Internet Access, see page 44 Setting Up NAT Forwarding for a Game Server, see page 45 Setting Up NAT Forwarding for a Game Server, see page 45 Configuring Firewall Rules to Allow a Specified Service, see page 47 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network, see page 50 Port Binding Configuration, see page 52 Configuring QoS to Prioritize Traffic, see page 56 Access the AMG1312-T Series from the Internet Using DDNS, see page 59 4.2 Setting Up Your DSL Connection This tutorial shows you how to set up your Internet connection using the web configurator. If you connect to the Internet through a DSL connection, use the information from your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to configure the AMG1312-T Series. Do the following steps:

1 2 3 4 Connect the AMG1312-T Series properly. Refer to the Quick Start Guide for details on the AMG1312-T Seriess hardware connection. Connect one end of a DSL cable to the DSL port of your AMG1312-T Series. The other end should be connected to the DSL port in your house or a DSL router/modem provided by your ISP. Connect one end of Ethernet cable to an Ethernet port on the AMG1312-T Series and the other end to a computer that you will use to access the web configuration. Connect the AMG1312-T Series to a power source, turn it on and wait for the POWER LED to become a steady green. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 34 Account Configuration For this example, the interface type is ADSL and the connection has the following information. Chapter 4 Tutorials General Mode Encapsulation User Name Password Service Name Multiplex IPv6/IPv4 Dual Stack PPP Authentication VPI VCI Others Router PPPoE 1234@DSL-Ex.com ABCDEF!

My DSL LLC Enabled Auto 0 33 IP Address: Obtain IP Address Automatically DNS Server: Obtained From ISP IPv6 Address: Obtain IPv6 Address Automatically DHCP IPv6: DHCP DHCP PD: Enable WAN Identifier Type: EUI64 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 35 Chapter 4 Tutorials Go to Network Setting > Broadband, enter or select these values and click Apply. This completes your DSL WAN connection setting. 4.3 IPv6 Address Configuration If the ISPs network supports IPv6, the ISP may assign an IPv6 address to the AMG1312-T Series automatically. 36 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials IPv6 IPv6 IPv6 In the Network Setting > Broadband screens IPv6 Address configuration section, select Obtain an IP Address Automatically. In the DHCP IPv6 field select DHCP to obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server. In the DHCP PD field select Enable to have the AMG1312-T Series pass the WAN prefix to LAN hosts. The LAN hosts can then use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses. 4.4 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network Thomas wants to set up a wireless network so that he can use his notebook to access the Internet. In this wireless network, the AMG1312-T Series serves as an access point (AP), and the notebook is the wireless client. The wireless client can access the Internet through the AP. Thomas has to configure the wireless network settings on the AMG1312-T Series. Then he can set up a wireless network using WPS (Section 4.4.2 on page 38) or manual configuration (Section 4.4.3 on page 42). 4.4.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings This example uses the following parameters to set up a wireless network. In the client, choose the AP with the SSID configured here. When prompted for a key, use the Pre-Shared Key configured here. SSID Security Mode Pre-Shared Key 802.11 Mode SecureWirelessNetwork WPA2-PSK DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork 802.11b+g+n AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 37 Chapter 4 Tutorials 1 Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. Configure the screen using the provided parameters (see page 37). Click Apply. EXAMPLE 2 Click Network Setting > Wireless > Advanced and make sure 802.11b+g+n is selected in the 802.11 Mode field. Click Apply. Thomas can now use the WPS feature to establish a wireless connection between his notebook and the AMG1312-T Series (see Section 4.4.2 on page 38). He can also use the notebooks wireless client to search for the AMG1312-T Series (see Section 4.4.3 on page 42). 4.4.2 Using WPS This section shows you how to set up a wireless network using WPS. WPS is a way to automatically set up a secure wireless network connection between an AP and a notebook. Limitations of using WPS are that is must be done two devices at a time and within two minutes. It uses the AMG1312-

T Series as the AP and ZyXEL NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to the notebook. 38 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials Note: The wireless client must be a WPS-aware device (for example, a WPS USB adapter or PCMCIA card). There are two WPS methods to set up the wireless client settings:

Push Button Configuration (PBC) - simply press a button. This is the easier of the two methods. PIN Configuration - configure a Personal Identification Number (PIN) on the AMG1312-T Series. A wireless client must also use the same PIN in order to download the wireless network settings from the AMG1312-T Series. Push Button Configuration (PBC) 1 Make sure that your AMG1312-T Series is turned on and your notebook is within the cover range of the wireless signal. 2 Make sure that you have installed the wireless client driver and utility in your notebook. 3 Make sure wireless LAN is enabled and the wireless security mode is set to WPA-PSK2 or No Security in the Network Setting > Wireless > General screen. 4 5 In the wireless client utility, go to the WPS setting page. Enable WPS and press the WPS button

(Start or WPS button). Push and hold the WPS button on the AMG1312-T Series for 1-2 seconds. Alternatively, you may log into AMG1312-T Seriess web configuration, enable WPS and click the WPS button in the Network Setting > Wireless > WPS screen. Note: It doesnt matter which button (on the client or the AMG1312-T Series) is pressed first. You must press the second button within two minutes of pressing the first one. The AMG1312-T Series sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the AMG1312-T Series securely. The following figure shows you an example of how to set up a wireless network and its security by pressing a button on both AMG1312-T Series and wireless client. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 39 Chapter 4 Tutorials Example WPS Process: PBC Method Wireless Client The Device WITHIN 2 MINUTES Press and hold for 5 seconds SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION PIN Configuration When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to use both the AMG1312-T Seriess web config ur at or and the wireless clients utility. 1 2 Launch your wireless clients configuration utility. Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method to get a PIN number. Enter the PIN number in the PIN section in the Network Setting > Wireless > WPS screen on the AMG1312-T Series. 40 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials 3 Click the Start and Register buttons (or the button next to the PIN field) on both the wireless client utility screen and the AMG1312-T Seriess WPS screen within two minutes. The AMG1312-T Series authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the AMG1312-T Series securely. The following figure shows you how to set up a wireless network and its security on a AMG1312-T Series and a wireless client by using PIN method. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 41 Chapter 4 Tutorials Example WPS Process: PIN Method Wireless Client The Device WITHIN 2 MINUTES Authentication by PIN SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION 4.4.3 Connecting Wirelessly to your AMG1312-T Series This section describes how to connect wirelessly to your AMG1312-T Series. The connection procedure is shown here using Windows XP as an example. 1 Right-click the wireless adapter icon which appears in the bottom right of your computer monitor. Click View Available Wireless Networks. 42 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Tutorial: Status Chapter 4 Tutorials 2 Select the AMG1312-T Seriess SSID name and click Connect (A). The SSID SecureWirelessNetwork is given here as an example. Tutorial: Status 3 You are prompted to enter a password. Enter it and click Connect. Tutorial: Status A 4 5 You may have to wait several minutes while your computer connects to the wireless network. You should now be securely connected wirelessly to the AMG1312-T Series. Tutorial: Status AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 43 Chapter 4 Tutorials Congratulations! Your computer is now ready to connect to the Internet wirelessly through your AMG1312-T Series. Note: If you cannot connect wirelessly to the AMG1312-T Series, check you have selected the correct SSID and entered the correct security key. If that does not work, ensure your wireless network adapter is enabled by clicking on the wireless adapter icon and clicking Enable. 4.5 Configuring the MAC Address Filter for Restricting Wireless Internet Access Thomas noticed that his daughter Josephine spends too much time surfing the web and downloading media files. He decided to prevent Josephine from accessing the Internet so that she can concentrate on preparing for her final exams. Josephines computer connects wirelessly to the Internet through the AMG1312-T Series. Thomas can deny access to the wireless network using the MAC address of Josephines computer. Thomas Josephine 1 Check the MAC address (physical address) of the wireless card on Josephines computer using the ipconfig /all command in a Command Prompt. 44 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials C:\>ipconfig /all Ethernet adapter Wireless Network Connection:

Media State . : Media connected Description . : Wireless USB Adapter Physical Address. : 00-1E-52-C3-5C-1B

---------------------------SNAP!--------------------------------

2 Click Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication. Select the wireless network in the SSID field and then Deny in the MAC Restrict Mode field. EXAMPLE 3 Enter the MAC address that you want to deny. Click OK. Josephine will no longer be able to access the Internet wirelessly through the AMG1312-T Series. 4.6 Setting Up NAT Forwarding for a Game Server Thomas manages a Doom server on a computer behind the AMG1312-T Series. In order for players on the Internet (like A in the figure below) coming through the default WAN connection (PVC0) to communicate with the Doom server, Thomas can use port forwarding. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 45 Chapter 4 Tutorials Tutorial: NAT Port Forwarding Setup D=192.168.1.34 LAN port 666 WAN A 4.6.1 Port Forwarding Thomas needs to configure the port settings and IP address on the AMG1312-T Series. Traffic should be forwarded to port 666 of the Doom server computer which has an IP address of 192.168.1.34. Thomas may set up the port settings by configuring the port settings for the Doom server computer

(see Section 11.3 on page 149 for more information). 1 Activate NAT in the Network Setting > NAT > General screen. Click Apply. 2 Click Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding. Select PVC0 as the WAN interface and click Add new rule. 3 Configure the screen with the following values:

46 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials Service Name Start/End Ports Server IP Address Select User Define. Enter 666 as the Start and End port. Enter the IP address of the Doom server (192.168.1.34 for this example). The screen should look as follows. Click Apply. EXAMPLE 4 The port forwarding settings you configured appear in the table. The AMG1312-T Series forwards port 666 traffic to the computer with IP address 192.168.1.34. EXAMPLE Players on the Internet then can have access to Thomas Doom server. 4.7 Configuring Firewall Rules to Allow a Specified Service By default the firewall will block traffic originating from the WAN (1). However, if you are running a server or other service, you may need to allow access from the WAN (2). The following tutorial will show how to allow traffic from WAN to LAN if it matches a specified port number. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 47 Chapter 4 Tutorials Tutorial: NAT Port Forwarding Setup A LAN WAN 2 1 1 Click Security > Firewall and select Custom. Click Apply to save your settings. Tutorial: Advanced > QoS 2 Click the Rules tab. In the Packet Direction field select WAN to LAN and click Add. Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup 3 The Add New Firewall Rule screen will appear. Click the Edit Customized Services button to access the following screen. Click Add and configure the following settings. In this tutorial, a hypothetical port 123 is allowed. Click OK. Service Name Service Type Port Number My_Service TCP 123 48 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup Chapter 4 Tutorials 4 In the Add New Firewall Rule screen, select Active. In the Available Services field, select the service you configured, My_Service. Click OK. Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 49 Chapter 4 Tutorials 5 The firewall rule you configured appears in the table. The AMG1312-T Series allows traffic from the WAN to LAN if it matches port 123. 4.8 Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions, you may connect a router to the AMG1312-T Seriess LAN. The router may be used to separate two department networks. This tutorial shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings. In the following figure, router R is connected to the AMG1312-T Seriess LAN. R connects to two networks, N1 (192.168.1.x/24) and N2 (192.168.10.x/24). If you want to send traffic from computer A (in N1 network) to computer B (in N2 network), the traffic is sent to the AMG1312-T Seriess WAN default gateway by default. In this case, B will never receive the traffic. N1 A R N2 B You need to specify a static routing rule on the AMG1312-T Series to specify R as the router in charge of forwarding traffic to N2. In this case, the AMG1312-T Series routes traffic from A to R and then R routes the traffic to B. 50 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials N1 A R N2 B This tutorial uses the following example IP settings:

Table 8 IP Settings in this Tutorial DEVICE / COMPUTER The AMG1312-T Seriess WAN The AMG1312-T Seriess LAN A Rs N1 Rs N2 B IP ADDRESS 172.16.1.1 192.168.1.1 192.168.1.34 192.168.1.253 192.168.10.2 192.168.10.33 To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2:

1 2 3 Log into the AMG1312-T Seriess Web Configurator. Click Network Setting > Static Route. Click Edit on a new rule in the Static Route screen. 4 Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings:

4a 4b 4c Type 192.168.10.0 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the destination, N2. Type 192.168.1.253 (Rs N1 address) in the Gateway IP Address field. Enter 1 in the Metric field. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 51 Chapter 4 Tutorials 4d Click OK. Now B should be able to receive traffic from A. You may need to additionally configure Bs firewall settings to allow specific traffic to pass through. 4.9 Port Binding Configuration This tutorial shows you how to configure port binding for WAN connections with different ATM QoS settings for different types of traffic. The port binding feature is used to group each WAN connection with specific LAN ports and WLANs. In this example ATM QoS settings are configured for a WAN PVC for time sensitive Media-On-Demand (MOD) traffic. ATM QoS settings are also configured for another WAN PVC for non-time sensitive data traffic. 4.9.1 Configuring ATM QoS for Multiple WAN Connections This example shows an application for multiple WAN connections with different ATM QoS Settings. More than one WAN connection on the AMG1312-T Series may be configured to record traffic statistics or calculate service charges. Three WAN connections are configured over the ADSL line:

The connection with VPI/VCI, 0/33, is dedicated for general data transmission. The connection with VPI/VCI, 0/34, is dedicated for VoIP service. The connection with VPI/VCI, 0/35, is dedicated for Media-On-Demand (MOD) service. To configure bandwidth for the WAN connections, access the WAN configuration Advanced Setup screen by clicking Network Setting > Broadband. Click Advanced Setup. 52 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials EXAMPLE To configure bandwidth for the data connection, select UBR with PCR in the ATM QoS Type field. Click Apply. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 53 Chapter 4 Tutorials To configure dedicated bandwidth of 400 kbps for the VoIP connection, select CBR in the ATM QoS Type field and enter the Peak Cell Rate as 943 (divide the bandwidth 400000 bps by 424). Click Apply to save the settings. To configure variable bandwidth of 2 Mbps for MOD data connection, select Realtime VBR in the ATM QoS Type field. Set the Peak Cell Rate as 4717 (divide the bandwidth 2mbps by 424) and set both the Sustain Cell Rate and Maximum Burst Size as 4716 (which is less than the peak cell rate). Click Apply to save the settings. 54 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials Configured WAN connections can be viewed by clicking the More Connections tab under Network Setting > Broadband. See the WAN Setup chapter (Chapter 6 on page 68) for more information on configuring WAN connections and ATM QoS settings. 4.9.2 Configuring Port Binding You can then group specific WAN PVCs with LAN ports or WLANs, so traffic from these ports is forwarded through specific WAN PVCs. In the configuration shown below, the WAN connections set up in the previous section are bound as follows:

Table 9 Port Binding Groups GROUP INDEX WAN CONNECTION 0 1 2 PVC0 - for Data PVC1 - for VoIP PVC2 - for MOD LAN PORT eth1, eth2, AP0 eth3 eth4 1 2 Access the port binding screen by clicking Network Setting > Port Binding, and select Activated Port Binding to turn on the port binding feature. Click the Port Binding tab, specify the Group Index and select the ports to include in the port binding group. Click Apply. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 55 Chapter 4 Tutorials EXAMPLE 3 The configured groups can be viewed by clicking the Port Binding Summary button. See the Port Binding chapter (Chapter 12 on page 157) for more details on configuring port binding. 4.10 Configuring QoS to Prioritize Traffic This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen. Lets say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office. You want to prioritize e-mail traffic because your task includes sending urgent updates to clients at least twice every hour. You also upload data files (such as logs and e-mail archives) to the FTP server throughout the day. Your colleagues use the Internet for research, as well as chat applications for communicating with other branch offices. In the following figure you want to configure QoS so that e-mail traffic gets the highest priority. You can do the following:

Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue (1) to e-mail traffic from the LAN interface, so that e-mail traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion. Note the MAC address (AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF for example) of your computer and map it to queue 1. Note: QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the AMG1312-T Series. Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on the AMG1312-T Series. DSL Your computer MAC=AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF E-mail: Queue 1 A colleagues computer Other traffic: Automatic classifier 56 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 1 Click Network Setting > QoS and check Active QoS. Click Apply. Tutorial: Advanced > QoS Chapter 4 Tutorials 2 Go to Network Setting > QoS > Queue Setup. Click the Edit icon next to an entry to configure a queue. 3 Select Active and give it a name (Queue1 in this example). Select WAN in the Interface field and 1 in the Priority and Weight fields. Then click OK. Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup 4 Go to Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup and click Add new Classifier. 5 Select Active and follow the settings as shown in the screen below. Then click OK. Note that you have to select TCP in the IP Protocol field first, then you can configure the source port range setting. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 57 Chapter 4 Tutorials Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Class Setup 58 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 4 Tutorials Interface To Queue Source MAC Address Source Port Range Protocol ID Select From LAN. Link this to a queue created in the Network Setting > QoS

> Queue Setup screen, which is the 1 queue created in this example. Type the MAC address of your computer -

AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF. Type the Source Mac Netmask if you know it. Enter the port number to which the rule should be applied -

25 for SMTP. Select the IP protocol type - TCP. This maps e-mail traffic to queue 1 created in the previous screen (see the Source Port Range field). This also maps your computers MAC address to queue 1 (see the Source MAC Address field). 4.11 Access the AMG1312-T Series from the Internet Using DDNS If you connect your AMG1312-T Series to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP address, it is inconvenient for you to manage the device from the Internet. The AMG1312-T Seriess WAN IP address changes dynamically. Dynamic DNS (DDNS) allows you to access the AMG1312-T Series using a domain name. http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org A a.b.c.d w.x.y.z To use this feature, you have to apply for DDNS service at www.dyndns.org. This tutorial shows you how to:

Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org Configuring DDNS on Your AMG1312-T Series Testing the DDNS Setting Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use DDNS. 4.11.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org 1 Open a browser and type http://www.dyndns.org. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 59 Chapter 4 Tutorials 2 3 4 Apply for a user account. This tutorial uses UserName1 and 12345 as the username and password. Log into www.dyndns.org using your account. Add a new DDNS host name. This tutorial uses the following settings as an example. Hostname: zyxelrouter.dyndns.org Service Type: Host with IP address IP Address: Enter the WAN IP address that your AMG1312-T Series is currently using. You can find the IP address on the AMG1312-T Seriess Web Configurator Status page. Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the AMG1312-T Series later. 4.11.2 Configuring DDNS on Your AMG1312-T Series Configure the following settings in the Network Setting > Dynamic DNS screen. Select Active Dynamic DNS. Select www.dyndns.org in the Service Provider field. Type zyxelrouter.dyndns.org in the Host Name field. Enter the user name (UserName1) and password (12345). Click Apply. 4.11.3 Testing the DDNS Setting Now you should be able to access the AMG1312-T Series from the Internet. To test this:

1 Open a web browser on the computer (using the IP address a.b.c.d) that is connected to the Internet. 2 3 60 Type http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org and press [Enter]. The AMG1312-T Seriess login page should appear. You can then log into the AMG1312-T Series and manage it. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide PART II Technical Reference 61 62 CHAPTER 5 Connection Status and System Info Screens 5.1 Overview After you log into the web configurator, the Connection Status screen appears. This shows the network connection status of the AMG1312-T Series and clients connected to it. Use the System Info screen to look at the current status of the device, system resources and interfaces (LAN, WAN, WLAN). 5.2 The Connection Status Screen Use this screen to view the network connection status of the device and its clients. A warning message appears if there is a connection problem. If you prefer to view the status in a list, click List View in the Viewing mode selection box. You can configure how often you want the AMG1312-T Series to update this screen in Refresh Interval. Figure 15 Connection Status: Icon View AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 63 Chapter 5 Connection Status and System Info Screens Figure 16 Connection Status: List View In Icon View, if you want to view information about a client, click the clients name and then click on Info. In List View, you can also view the clients information. 5.3 The System Info Screen Click Connection Status > System Info to open this screen. Figure 17 System Info Screen 64 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 5 Connection Status and System Info Screens Each field is described in the following table. Table 10 System Info Screen DESCRIPTION LABEL Select how often you want the AMG1312-T Series to update this screen from the drop-down Refresh Interval list box. Device Information This field displays the AMG1312-T Series system name. It is used for identification. Host Name Model Name This is the model name of your device. MAC Address Firmware Version This is the MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address unique to your AMG1312-T Series. This field displays the current version of the firmware inside the device. It also shows the date the firmware version was created. Go to the Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade screen to change it. DSL Version This is the current version of the AMG1312-T Seriess DSL modem code. WAN Information DSL Mode Annex Type IP Address IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary/

Secondary DNS IPv6 Global IP IPv6 Prefix Length IPv6 Gateway IPv6 WAN DNS1/2 Link-Local Address IPv4/IPv6 MTU VPI/VCI LAN Information IP Address IP Subnet Mask IPv6 Address IPv6 Prefix Length IPv6 Prefix This is the method of encapsulation used by your ISP. This is the ADSL Annex Type that your AMG1312-T Series is using. This field displays the current IP address of the AMG1312-T Series in the WAN. This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN. This is the IP address of the default gateway, if applicable. This is the primary/secondary DNS server IP address assigned to the AMG1312-T Series. This is the current IPv6 address of the AMG1312-T Series in the WAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. This is the current IPv6 prefix length in the WAN. This is the IPv6 address of the default gateway, if applicable. This is the primary/secondary DNS server IPv6 address assigned to the AMG1312-T Series. This is the link local address assigned to the AMG1312-T Series within the LAN. This is the MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) for IPv4 and IPv6 packets passing through the WAN interface. This is the Virtual Path Identifier and Virtual Channel Identifier that you entered in the Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection screen. This field displays the current IP address of the AMG1312-T Series in the LAN. This field displays the current subnet mask in the LAN. This is the current IPv6 address of the AMG1312-T Series in the LAN. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. This is the current IPv6 prefix length in the LAN. This is the current IPv6 prefix in the LAN. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 65 Chapter 5 Connection Status and System Info Screens Table 10 System Info Screen (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION This is the current global IPv6 address of the AMG1312-T Series. IPv6 Global IP DHCP This field displays what DHCP services the AMG1312-T Series is providing to the LAN. Choices are:

Server - The AMG1312-T Series is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN. Relay - The AMG1312-T Series acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. None - The AMG1312-T Series is not providing any DHCP services to the LAN. This is the first/second DNS server IPv6 address the AMG1312-T Series passes to the DHCP clients. IPv6 LAN DNS1/2 WLAN Information Status SSID Channel Security Mode WPS Scheduling WiFi MAC Security Firewall Interface Status This displays whether wireless LAN is turned on or off. This is the descriptive name used to identify the AMG1312-T Series in the wireless LAN. This is the channel number used by the AMG1312-T Series now. This displays the type of security the AMG1312-T Series is using in the wireless LAN. Configured displays when the WPS security settings have been configured and wireless clients can connect with the device through WPS. Unconfigured displays when the device has not been configured and wireless clients cant establish a link with the device through WPS. This displays whether WLAN scheduling is activated. This is the MAC (Media Access Control) of the WiFi interface. This displays whether or not the AMG1312-T Seriess firewall is activated. Click this to go to the screen where you can change it. Interface Status This column displays each interface the AMG1312-T Series has. This field indicates whether or not the AMG1312-T Series is using the interface. For the DSL interface, this field displays Down (line is down), Up (line is up or connected), Initializing (line is initializing), Establishing Link (line is establishing a link) if you're using Ethernet encapsulation and Down (line is down), Up (line is up or connected), Idle

(line (ppp) idle), Dial (starting to trigger a call) and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using PPPoE encapsulation. For the LAN interface, this field displays Up when the AMG1312-T Series is connected through an Ethernet cable to a computer or a HUB. It displays Down when the AMG1312-T Seriess Ethernet port is disconnected. For the WLAN interface, it displays Active when WLAN is enabled or InActive when WLAN is disabled. For the LAN interface, this displays the port speed. Rate For the WAN interface, this displays the DSL link rate downstream and upstream. For the DSL interface, it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate. For the WLAN interface, it displays the maximum transmission rate when WLAN is enabled or N/A when WLAN is disabled. System Status 66 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 5 Connection Status and System Info Screens Table 10 System Info Screen (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION This field displays how long the DSL connection has been active. DSL Up Time System Up Time Current Date/Time System Resource CPU Usage Memory Usage This field displays how long the AMG1312-T Series has been running since it last started up. The AMG1312-T Series starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it (Maintenance >

Reboot), or when you reset it (see Chapter 1 on page 18). This field displays the current date and time in the AMG1312-T Series. You can change this in Maintenance > Time Setting. This field displays what percentage of the AMG1312-T Seriess processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the AMG1312-T Series is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications. This field displays what percentage of the AMG1312-T Seriess memory is currently used. Usually, this percentage should not increase much. If memory usage does get close to 100%

and remains like that for a high period of time, the AMG1312-T Series may become unstable and you should restart it. See Chapter 24 on page 209, or turn off the device (unplug the power) for a few seconds. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 67 CHAPTER 6 Broadband 6.1 Overview This chapter describes the AMG1312-T Seriess Broadband screens. Use these screens to configure your AMG1312-T Series for Internet access. A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet. It connects your private networks (such as a LAN (Local Area Network) and other networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations. Figure 18 LAN and WAN LAN WAN 6.1.1 What You Can Do in the WAN Screens Use the Internet Connection screen (Section 6.2 on page 69) to configure the WAN settings on the AMG1312-T Series for Internet access. Use the More Connections screen (Section 6.3 on page 75) to set up additional Internet access connections. Use the 3G Backup screen to configure 3G WAN connection (Section 6.4 on page 80). 6.1.2 What You Need to Know About WAN Encapsulation Method Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) or PPPoA, they should also provide a username and password (and service name) for user authentication. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 68 Chapter 6 Broadband WAN IP Address The WAN IP address is an IP address for the AMG1312-T Series, which makes it accessible from an outside network. It is used by the AMG1312-T Series to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the AMG1312-T Series tries to access the Internet. If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es) (and a gateway IP address if you use the Ethernet or ENET ENCAP encapsulation method). Multicast Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just one. IGMP IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. There are three versions of IGMP. IGMP version 2 and 3 are improvements over version 1, but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. IPv6 IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to increase IP address space and enhance features. The AMG1312-T Series supports IPv4/IPv6 dual stack and can connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks. See (Appendix E on page 277) for more information about IPv6. Finding Out More See Section 6.5 on page 82 for technical background information on WAN. 6.1.3 Before You Begin You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address. Get this information from your ISP. 6.2 The Internet Connection Screen Use this screen to change your AMG1312-T Seriess WAN settings. Click Network Setting >

Broadband > Internet Connection. The screen differs by the WAN type and encapsulation you select. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 69 Chapter 6 Broadband Figure 19 Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection > Auto Sync Up 70 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen. Chapter 6 Broadband Table 11 Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection LABEL Line Type Select the DSL mode supported by your ISP. DESCRIPTION General Mode Encapsulation User Name Password Service Name Multiplex IPv6/IPv4 Dual Stack PPP Authentication Use Auto Sync-Up if you are not sure which mode to choose from. The AMG1312-T Series dynamically diagnoses the mode supported by the ISP and selects the best compatible one for your connection. Other options are ADSL2+, ADSL2, G.DMT, T1.413 and G.lite. The AMG1312-T Series device supports Ethernet (ETH1) mode. To select this mode, connect a modem or router to the WAN port and select Ethernet (ETH1). Note: The AMG1312-T Series reboots when transferring to and from Ethernet (ETH1) type. Select Router (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP gives you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an Internet account. Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISPs DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on the AMG1312-T Series. Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices vary depending on the mode you select in the Mode field. If you select Router in the Mode field, select PPPoA, RFC 1483, ENET ENCAP or PPPoE. If you select Bridge in the Mode field, method of encapsulation is not available.

(PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only) Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given.

(PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only) Enter the password associated with the user name above.

(PPPoE only) Type the name of your PPPoE service here. Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list. Choices are VC or LLC. If you select Enable, the AMG1312-T Series can connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks and choose the protocol for applications according to the address type. If you select Disable, the AMG1312-T Series will operate in IPv4 mode. The AMG1312-T Series supports PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) and CHAP

(Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol). CHAP is more secure than PAP;

however, PAP is readily available on more platforms. Use the drop-down list box to select an authentication protocol for outgoing calls. Options are:

AUTO - Your AMG1312-T Series accepts either CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote node. CHAP - Your AMG1312-T Series accepts CHAP only. Virtual Circuit ID PAP - Your AMG1312-T Series accepts PAP only. VPI (Virtual Path Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) define a virtual circuit. Refer to the appendix for more information. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 71 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 11 Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection (continued) LABEL VPI DESCRIPTION This option is available if you select Router in the Mode field. VCI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you. This option is available if you select Router in the Mode field. IP Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you. This option is available if you select Router in the Mode field. A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address;

otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address field and a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP) below. Routing Feature Apply as Default Gateway DNS Server - This section is not available when you select Bridge in the Mode field. Select this option to have the AMG1312-T Series use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway. Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Select Obtained from ISP to have the AMG1312-T Series get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically. Select UserDefined and enter the DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Select None to not configure a DNS server. You must know the IP address of amachine in order to access it. IPv6 Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically DHCP IPv6 Select this option if you want to have the AMG1312-T Series use the IPv6 prefix from the connected routers Router Advertisement (RA) to generate an IPv6 address. Select DHCP if you want to obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server. The IP address assigned by a DHCPv6 server has priority over the IP address automatically generated by the AMG1312-T Series using the IPv6 prefix from an RA. Select SLAAC (Stateless address autoconfiguration) to have the AMG1312-T Series use the prefix to automatically generate a unique IP address that does not need to be maintained by a DHCP server. Select Auto to have the AMG1312-T Series indicate to hosts for IPv6 address generation depending on the M/O (Managed/Other) flag values in the router advertisements sending to hosts. If M flag is 1, the AMG1312-T Series will indicate to hosts to obtain network settings (such as WAN IP, LAN prefix and DNS settings) through DHCPv6. If M flag is 0, the AMG1312-T Series will check O flag. If O flag is 1, the AMG1312-T Series will indicate to hosts to obtain DNS information and LAN prefix through DHCPv6. If O flag is 0, the AMG1312-T Series will not get information through DHCPv6. Select Enable to use DHCP PD (Prefix Delegation) to allow the AMG1312-T Series to pass the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The hosts can then use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses. Select Manual to manually enter a WAN Identifier as the interface ID to identify the WAN interface. The WAN Identifier is appended to the IPv6 address prefix to create the routable global IPv6 address. Select EUI64 to use the EUI-64 format to generate an interface ID from the MAC address of the WAN interface. DHCP PD WAN Identifier Type 72 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 6 Broadband Table 11 Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection (continued) LABEL WAN Identifier DESCRIPTION If you selected Manual, enter the WAN Identifier in this field. The WAN identifier should be unique and 64 bits in hexadecimal form. Every 16 bit block should be separated by a colon as in XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX where X is a hexadecimal character. Blocks of zeros can be represented with double colons as in XXXX:XXXX::XXXX. Bridge and Routing mode in the same WAN (ENET ENCAP and PPPoE encapsulation only) This feature allows you to set some LAN port(s) and/or SSID(s) to be in bridge mode with the WAN interface, while other LAN port(s) and SSID(s) can still use Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on the AMG1312-T Series. Select this option to bridge traffic between the WAN interface and certain Ethernet Enable Con-current port(s) and/or SSID(s). Other ports and SSIDs will be still in router mode with the WAN WAN interface. Note: The port binding feature will be disabled automatically when you select this option. Connection (PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only) Keep Alive Select Keep Alive when you want your connection up all the time. The AMG1312-T Series will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected. Connect on Demand Apply Cancel Advanced Setup Note: Do not specify an always-on connection unless your telephone company offers flat-rate service or you need a constant connection and the cost is of no concern. Select Connect on Demand when you don't want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time-out in seconds. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Click this to display the Advanced WAN Setup screen and edit more details of your WAN setup. Click this button again to display less fields in this screen. 6.2.1 Advanced Setup Use this screen to edit your AMG1312-T Series's advanced WAN settings. Click the Advanced Setup button in the Internet Connection screen. The screen appears as shown. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 73 Chapter 6 Broadband Figure 20 Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection: Advanced Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 12 Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection: Advanced Setup LABEL RIP Direction DESCRIPTION RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. Use this field to control how much routing information the AMG1312-T Series sends and receives on the subnet. RIP Version Multicast MLD Proxy ATM QoS ATM QoS Type Peak Cell Rate Select the RIP direction from None, Both, In Only and Out Only. This field is not configurable if you select None in the RIP Direction field. Select the RIP version from RIP-1, RIP2-B and RIP2-M. Multicast packets are sent to a group of computers on the LAN and are an alternative to unicast packets (packets sent to one computer) and broadcast packets (packets sent to every computer). Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group. The AMG1312-T Series supports IGMP-v1, IGMP-

v2 and IGMP-v3. Select None to disable it. Select the version of MLD proxy (v1 or v2) to have the AMG1312-T Series act as for this connection. This allows the AMG1312-T Series to get subscription information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly. Select None to turn off MLD proxy. Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select UBR With PCR (Unspecified Bit Rate) for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here. 74 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 6 Broadband Table 12 Network Setting > Broadband > Internet Connection: Advanced Setup (continued) LABEL Sustain Cell Rate Maximum Burst Size PPPoE Passthrough MTU MTU DESCRIPTION The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec. Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535. If encapsulation type is PPPoE, select this to enable PPPoE Passthrough. In addition to the Devices built-in PPPoE client, you can select this to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the device. Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address. The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) defines the size of the largest packet allowed on an interface or connection. Enter the MTU in this field. For ENET ENCAP, the MTU value is 1500. For PPPoE, the MTU value is 1492. For PPPoA and RFC 1483, the MTU is 65535. 6.3 The More Connections Screen The AMG1312-T Series allows you to configure more than one Internet access connection. To configure additional Internet access connections click Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections. The screen differs by the encapsulation you select. When you use the Broadband >

Internet Connection screen to set up Internet access, you are configuring the first WAN connection. Figure 21 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 75 Chapter 6 Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 13 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections LABEL ADSL Connections Table

Active This is an index number indicating the number of the corresponding connection. This field indicates whether the connection is active or not. Node Name VPI/VCI Encapsulation Modify Clear the check box to disable the connection. Select the check box to enable it. This is the name you gave to the Internet connection. This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) numbers configured for this WAN connection. This field indicates the encapsulation method of the Internet connection. The first (ISP) connection is read-only in this screen. Use the Broadband > Internet Connection screen to edit it. Click the Edit icon to edit the Internet connection settings. Click this icon on an empty configuration to add a new Internet access setup. Click the Remove icon to delete the Internet access setup from your connection list. Ethernet Connections Table

Active This is an index number indicating the number of the corresponding connection. This field indicates whether the connection is active or not. Node Name VID Encapsulation Modify Clear the check box to disable the connection. Select the check box to enable it. This is the name you gave to the Internet connection. This field displays the VLAN ID number used by this connection. This field indicates the encapsulation method of the Internet connection. The first (ISP) connection is read-only in this screen. Use the Broadband > Internet Connection screen to edit it. Click the Edit icon to edit the Internet connection settings. Click this icon on an empty configuration to add a new Internet access setup. Click the Remove icon to delete the Internet access setup from your connection list. 6.3.1 More Connections Edit Use this screen to configure a connection. Click the edit icon in the More Connections screen to display the following screen. 76 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 22 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections: Edit Chapter 6 Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 14 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections: Edit LABEL General Active DESCRIPTION Select the check box to activate or clear the check box to deactivate this connection. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 77 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 14 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections: Edit (continued) LABEL Node Name Mode DESCRIPTION Enter a unique, descriptive name of up to 13 ASCII characters for this connection. Select Router from the drop-down list box if your ISP allows multiple computers to share an Internet account. If you select Bridge, the AMG1312-T Series will forward any packet that it does not route to this remote node; otherwise, the packets are discarded. Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop-down list box. Choices vary depending on the mode you select in the Mode field. If you select Router in the Mode field, select PPPoA, RFC 1483, ENET ENCAP or PPPoE. If you select Bridge in the Mode field, method of encapsulation is not available. Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop-down list. Choices are VC or LLC. By prior agreement, a protocol is assigned a specific virtual circuit, for example, VC1 will carry IP. If you select VC, specify separate VPI and VCI numbers for each protocol. For LLC-based multiplexing or PPP encapsulation, one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header. In this case, only one set of VPI and VCI numbers need be specified for all protocols. If you select Enable, the AMG1312-T Series can connect to IPv4 and IPv6 networks and choose the protocol for applications according to the address type. If you select Disable, the AMG1312-T Series will operate in IPv4 mode. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you. The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you. This option is available if you select Router in the Mode field. A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed;

the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. If you use the encapsulation type except RFC 1483, select Obtain an IP Address Automatically when you have a dynamic IP address; otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address field below. If you use RFC 1483, enter the IP address given by your ISP in the IP Address field. Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation. Specify a gateway IP address (supplied by your ISP). Enter the primary DNS servers address for the AMG1312-T Series. Enter the secondary DNS servers address for the AMG1312-T Series. Encapsulation Multiplex IPv6/IPv4 Dual Stack VPI VCI IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Primary DNS Secondary DNS NAT SUA Only is available only when you select Router in the Mode field. Apply Cancel Advanced Setup Select SUA Only if you have one public IP address and want to use NAT. Otherwise, select None to disable NAT. Click this to save your changes. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to display more fields in this screen to configure more details of your WAN settings. 78 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 6.3.2 Configuring More Connections Advanced Setup Use this screen to edit your AMG1312-T Series's advanced WAN settings. Click the Advanced Setup arrow icon in the More Connections Edit screen. The screen appears as shown. Figure 23 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections: Edit: Advanced Setup Chapter 6 Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 15 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections: Edit: Advanced Setup LABEL RIP & Multicast Setup RIP Direction RIP Version Select the RIP Direction from None, Both, In Only and Out Only. This field is not configurable if you select None in the RIP Direction field. Select the RIP Version from RIP-1, RIP2-B and RIP2-M. Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group. The AMG1312-T Series supports IGMP-v1, IGMP-v2 and IGMP-v3. Select None to disable it. Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic. Select UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate) for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail. Select nrtVBR (Variable Bit Rate-non Real Time) or rtVBR (Variable Bit Rate-

Real Time) for bursty traffic and bandwidth sharing with other applications. Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate

(PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here. The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR. Note that system default is 0 cells/sec. Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535. Multicast ATM QoS ATM QoS Type Peak Cell Rate Sustain Cell Rate Maximum Burst Size MTU AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 79 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 15 Network Setting > Broadband > More Connections: Edit: Advanced Setup (continued) LABEL MTU DESCRIPTION The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) defines the size of the largest packet allowed on an interface or connection. Enter the MTU in this field. For ENET ENCAP, the MTU value is 1500. For PPPoE, the MTU value is 1492. Apply Cancel For PPPoA and RFC, the MTU is 100-1500. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 6.4 The 3G Backup Screen The USB ports (at the left side panel of the AMG1312-T Series) allow you to attach a 3G dongle to wirelessly connect to a 3G network for Internet access. You can have the AMG1312-T Series use the 3G WAN connection as a backup. Disconnect the DSL and Ethernet WAN ports to use the 3G dongle as your primary WAN connection. The AMG1312-T Series automatically uses a wired WAN connection when available. Note: This AMG1312-T Series supports connecting one 3G dongle at a time. Figure 24 Internet Access Application: 3G WAN Use this screen to configure your 3G settings. Click Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup. 80 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Note: The actual data rate you obtain varies depending the 3G card you use, the signal strength to the service providers base station, and so on. Figure 25 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup Chapter 6 Broadband The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 16 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup LABEL General 3G Backup DESCRIPTION Card description Username Password PIN Select Enable to have the AMG1312-T Series use the 3G connection as your WAN or a backup when the wired WAN connection fails. This field displays the manufacturer and model name of your 3G card if you inserted one in the AMG1312-T Series. Otherwise, it displays N/A. Type the user name (of up to 64 ASCII printable characters) given to you by your service provider. Type the password (of up to 64 ASCII printable characters) associated with the user name above. A PIN (Personal Identification Number) code is a key to a 3G card. Without the PIN code, you cannot use the 3G card. If your ISP enabled PIN code authentication, enter the 4-digit PIN code (0000 for example) provided by your ISP. If you enter the PIN code incorrectly, the 3G card may be blocked by your ISP and you cannot use the account to access the Internet. If your ISP disabled PIN code authentication, leave this field blank. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 81 Chapter 6 Broadband Table 16 Network Setting > Broadband > 3G Backup (continued) LABEL Dial string DESCRIPTION Enter the phone number (dial string) used to dial up a connection to your service providers base station. Your ISP should provide the phone number. APN IP Address Obtain DNS info dynamically Use the following static IP address IP Address DNS server Obtain DNS info dynamically Use the following static DNS IP address Primary DNS server Secondary DNS server Connection Keep alive Connect on demand NAT Active Apply Cancel For example, *99# is the dial string to establish a GPRS or 3G connection in Taiwan. Enter the APN (Access Point Name) provided by your service provider. Connections with different APNs may provide different services (such as Internet access or MMS (Multi-Media Messaging Service)) and charge method. You can enter up to 32 ASCII printable characters. Spaces are allowed. Select this to have the AMG1312-T Series get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically. Select this to have the AMG1312-T Series use the DNS server addresses you configure manually. Enter your WAN IP address in this field if you selected Use the following static IP address. Select this to have the Device get the DNS server addresses from the ISP automatically. Select this to have the Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually. Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP. Select this to enable the keep alive function. Select Connect on Demand if you do not want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time in the Max Idle Time field. Select Active to start the NAT on the AMG1312-T Series. Click Apply to save your changes back to the AMG1312-T Series. Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration. 6.5 WAN Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 6.5.1 Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The AMG1312-T Series supports the following methods. 82 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 6 Broadband 6.5.1.1 ENET ENCAP The MAC Encapsulated Routing Link Protocol (ENET ENCAP) is only implemented with the IP network protocol. IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment. For instance, it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged ATM cells. ENET ENCAP requires that you specify a gateway IP address in the Gateway IP Address field in the wizard or WAN screen. You can get this information from your ISP. 6.5.1.2 PPP over Ethernet The AMG1312-T Series supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF Draft standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The PPPoE option is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE. For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example RADIUS). One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals. Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site. By implementing PPPoE directly on the AMG1312-T Series (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the AMG1312-T Series does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs computers will have access. 6.5.1.3 PPPoA PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A PPPoA connection functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The AMG1312-T Series encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC (Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service Providers (ISP) DSLAM (Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) Access Multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP. 6.5.1.4 RFC 1483 RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5

(AAL5). The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit

(LLC-based multiplexing) and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit (VC-based multiplexing). Please refer to RFC 1483 for more detailed information. 6.5.2 Multiplexing There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 83 Chapter 6 Broadband VC-based Multiplexing In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for example, VC1 carries IP, etc. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical. LLC-based Multiplexing In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs. 6.5.3 VPI and VCI Be sure to use the correct Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) numbers assigned to you. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 and for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Please see the appendix for more information. 6.5.4 IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP. However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and ENET ENCAP gateway. IP Assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation If you have a dynamic IP, then the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields are not applicable

(N/A). If you have a Static IP Address assigned by your ISP, then they should also assign you a Subnet Mask and a Gateway IP Address. IP Assignment with RFC 1483 Encapsulation In this case the IP address assignment must be static. IP Assignment with ENET ENCAP Encapsulation In this case you can have either a static or dynamic IP. For a static IP you must fill in all the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields as supplied by your ISP. However for a dynamic IP, the AMG1312-T Series acts as a DHCP client on the WAN port and so the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields are not applicable (N/A) as the DHCP server assigns them to the AMG1312-T Series. 6.5.5 Nailed-Up Connection (PPP) A nailed-up connection is a dial-up line where the connection is always up regardless of traffic demand. The AMG1312-T Series does two things when you specify a nailed-up connection. The first is that idle timeout is disabled. The second is that the AMG1312-T Series will try to bring up the connection when turned on and whenever the connection is down. A nailed-up connection can be very expensive for obvious reasons. 84 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Do not specify a nailed-up connection unless your telephone company offers flat-rate service or you need a constant connection and the cost is of no concern. Chapter 6 Broadband 6.5.6 NAT NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network. 6.6 Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections. Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed. Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be greater than the PCR. Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again. If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate. The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS. Figure 26 Example of Traffic Shaping AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 85 Chapter 6 Broadband 6.6.1 ATM Traffic Classes These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic Management 4.0 Specification. Constant Bit Rate (CBR) Constant Bit Rate (CBR) provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being sent. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate delay). CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate, cells may be dropped. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution video and voice. Variable Bit Rate (VBR) The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections. Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into real time (VBR-RT) or non-real time

(VBR-nRT) connections. The VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth (a PCR is specified) but is only available when data is being sent. An example of an VBR-RT connection would be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics. The VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It is commonly used for "bursty" traffic typical on LANs. PCR and MBS define the burst levels, SCR defines the minimum level. An example of an VBR-nRT connection would be non-time sensitive data file transfers. Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers. However, UBR doesn't guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth. An example application is background file transfer. 86 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide CHAPTER 7 Wireless LAN 7.1 Overview This chapter describes how to perform tasks related to setting up and optimizing your wireless network, including the following. Turning the wireless connection on or off. Configuring a name, wireless channel and security for the network. Using WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) to configure your wireless network. Setting up multiple wireless networks. Using a MAC (Media Access Control) address filter to restrict access to the wireless network. Performing other performance-related wireless tasks. 7.1.1 What You Can Do in the Wireless LAN Screens This section describes the AMG1312-T Seriess Network Setting > Wireless screens. Use these screens to set up your AMG1312-T Seriess wireless connection. Use the General screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode (Section 7.2 on page 88). Use the More/Guest AP screen (see Section 7.3 on page 94) to set up multiple wireless networks on your AMG1312-T Series and/or set up a guest wireless network on your AMG1312-T Seriesto allow associated wireless clients to access the Internet. Use the MAC Authentication screen to allow or deny wireless clients based on their MAC addresses from connecting to the AMG1312-T Series (Section 7.4 on page 96). Use the WPS screen (see Section 7.5 on page 97) to enable or disable WPS, generate a security PIN (Personal Identification Number) and see information about the AMG1312-T Seriess WPS status. Use the WDS screen (see Section 7.6 on page 99) to set up a Wireless Distribution System, in which the AMG1312-T Series acts as a bridge with other ZyXEL access points. Use the WMM screen to enable WiFi MultiMedia (WMM) to ensure quality of service in wireless networks for multimedia applications (Section 7.7 on page 100). Use the Scheduling screen (see Section 7.8 on page 100) to configure the dates/times to enable or disable the wireless LAN. Use the Advanced screen to configure wireless advanced features (Section 7.9 on page 101). You dont necessarily need to use all these screens to set up your wireless connection. For example, you may just want to set up a network name, a wireless radio channel and security in the General screen. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 87 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7.1.2 What You Need to Know About Wireless Wireless Basics Wireless is essentially radio communication. In the same way that walkie-talkie radios send and receive information over the airwaves, wireless networking devices exchange information with one another. A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange information with radios attached to other computers. Like walkie-talkies, most wireless networking devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to use. However, wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data encryption. Finding Out More See Section 7.10 on page 102 for advanced technical information on wireless networks. 7.1.3 Before You Start Before you start using these screens, ask yourself the following questions. See Section 7.1.2 on page 88 if some of the terms used here are not familiar to you. What wireless standards do the other wireless devices in your network support (IEEE 802.11g, for example)? What is the most appropriate standard to use?

What security options do the other wireless devices in your network support (WPA-PSK, for example)? What is the strongest security option supported by all the devices in your network?

Do the other wireless devices in your network support WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)? If so, you can set up a well-secured network very easily. Even if some of your devices support WPS and some do not, you can use WPS to set up your network and then add the non-WPS devices manually, although this is somewhat more complicated to do. What advanced options do you want to configure, if any? If you want to configure advanced options such as Quality of Service, ensure that you know precisely what you want to do. If you do not want to configure advanced options, leave them as they are. 7.2 The General Screen Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode. Note: If you are configuring the AMG1312-T Series from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the AMG1312-T Seriess SSID, channel or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the AMG1312-T Seriess new settings. Click Network Setting > Wireless to open the General screen. 88 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 27 Network Setting > Wireless > General Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 17 Network Setting > Wireless > General LABEL Wireless Network Setup Wireless Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name

(SSID) Select Enable Wireless LAN to activate wireless LAN. The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Hide SSID Client Isolation MBSSID/LAN Isolation Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN. Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with each other through the AMG1312-T Series. Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with clients in other SSIDs or wired LAN devices through the AMG1312-T Series. Select both Client Isolation and MBSSID/LAN Isolation to allow this SSIDs wireless clients to only connect to the Internet through the AMG1312-T Series. Set the operating channel manually by selecting a channel from the Channel Selection list or use Auto to have it automatically determine a channel to use. This field displays the channel the AMG1312-T Series is currently using. Channel Selection Operating Channel Security Level AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 89 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 17 Network Setting > Wireless > General (continued) LABEL Security Mode DESCRIPTION Select Basic (WEP) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK, WPA(2)) to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the AMG1312-T Series. When you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication. Apply Cancel See the following sections for more details about this field. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 7.2.1 No Security Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption or authentication. Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your AMG1312-T Series, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range. Figure 28 Wireless > General: No Security 7.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption) WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points

(AP) to keep network communications private. Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key. 90 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Note: WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using widely-available software. It is strongly recommended that you use a more effective security mechanism. Use the strongest security mechanism that all the wireless devices in your network support. For example, use WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK if all your wireless devices support it, or use WPA or WPA2 if your wireless devices support it and you have a RADIUS server. If your wireless devices support nothing stronger than WEP, use the highest encryption level available. Your AMG1312-T Series allows you to configure one 64-bit or 128-bit WEP key. In order to configure and enable WEP encryption, click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen, then select Basic as the security level. Figure 29 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP) The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen. Table 18 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP) LABEL Security Level Generate password automatically Password DESCRIPTION Select Basic to enable WEP data encryption. Select this option to have the AMG1312-T Series automatically generate a password. The password field will not be configurable when you select this option. The password (WEP key) are used to encrypt data. Both the AMG1312-T Series and the wireless stations must use the same password (WEP key) for data transmission. If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters

("0-9", "A-F"). If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters

("0-9", "A-F"). Select 64-bits or 128-bits. WEP Encryption This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use. 7.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK) The WPA-PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over WEP. Using a Pre-Shared Key (PSK), both the AMG1312-T Series and the connecting client share a common password in order to validate the connection. This type of encryption, while robust, is not as strong as WPA, WPA2 or even WPA2-PSK. The WPA2-PSK security mode is a newer, more robust version of the WPA encryption standard. It offers slightly better security, although the use of PSK makes it less robust than it could be. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 91 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the security level. Then select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the Security Mode list. Figure 30 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK The following table describes the wireless LAN security labels in this screen. Table 19 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK LABEL Security Level Security Mode Pre-Shared Key DESCRIPTION Select More Secure to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption. Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. more.../hide more WPA-PSK Compatible This field appears when you choose WPA-PSK2 as the Security Mode. Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 63 case-sensitive keyboard characters. Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click hide more to hide them. Group Key Update Timer Encryption Select Enable to allow wireless devices using WPA-PSK security mode to connect to your AMG1312-T Series. The AMG1312-T Series supports WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK simultaneously. Otherwise, select Disable. The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group key out to all clients. This field displays the encryption type for data encryption. If you choose WPA-PSK as the security mode, the AMG1312-T Series uses TKIP for data encryption. If you choose WPA2-PSK as the security mode and enable WPA-PSK Compatible, the AMG1312-T Series uses either TKIP and AES (TKIPAES MIX) for data encryption. If you choose WPA2-PSK as the security mode but disable WPA-PSK Compatible, the AMG1312-T Series uses AES for data encryption. 7.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication The WPA2 security mode is currently the most robust form of encryption for wireless networks. It requires a RADIUS server to authenticate user credentials and is a full implementation the security protocol. Use this security option for maximum protection of your network. However, it is the least backwards compatible with older devices. 92 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The WPA security mode is a security subset of WPA2. It requires the presence of a RADIUS server on your network in order to validate user credentials. This encryption standard is slightly older than WPA2 and therefore is more compatible with older devices. Click Network Setting > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More Secure as the security level. Then select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list. Figure 31 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 20 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2) LABEL Security Level Security Mode Authentication Server DESCRIPTION Select More Secure to enable WPA(2) data encryption. Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop-down list box. IP Address Port Number Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation. Enter the port number of the external authentication server. Shared Secret more.../hide more ReAuthentication Timer Network Re-auth Interval WPA Compatible You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information. Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the AMG1312-T Series. The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your AMG1312-T Series. The key is not sent over the network. Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click hide more to hide them. Enter how often the external authentication server requires a connected wireless client to reauthenticate itself to the server again. Specify how often wireless stations have to resend user names and passwords in order to stay connected. This field is available only when you select WPA2 as security mode. If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority. This field is only available for WPA2. Select this if you want the AMG1312-T Series to support WPA and WPA2 simultaneously. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 93 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 20 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2) (continued) LABEL Group Key Update Timer Encryption DESCRIPTION The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group key out to all clients. Select the encryption type for data encryption. If you choose WPA as the security mode, the AMG1312-T Series uses TKIP for data encryption. If you choose WPA2 as the security mode and enable WPA-PSK Compatible, the AMG1312-T Series uses either TKIP and AES (TKIPAES MIX) for data encryption. If you choose WPA2 as the security mode but disable WPA-PSK Compatible, the AMG1312-T Series uses AES for data encryption. 7.3 The More/Guest AP Screen This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple Basic Service Sets (BSSs) on the AMG1312-

T Series. Click Network Setting > Wireless > More/guest AP. The following screen displays. Figure 32 Network Setting > Wireless > More/guest AP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 21 Network Setting > Wireless > More/guest AP LABEL

Active DESCRIPTION This is the index number of each SSID profile. This field indicates whether this SSID is active. A yellow bulb signifies that this SSID is active. A gray bulb signifies that this SSID is not active. An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the AMG1312-T Seriess BSSs. The SSID

(Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service Set with which a wireless device is associated. SSID This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility. This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile. Click the Edit icon to configure the SSID profile. Security Modify 7.3.1 More AP Edit Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the More AP screen. The following screen displays. 94 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 33 More AP: Edit Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 22 More AP: Edit LABEL Wireless Network Setup Wireless Wireless Network Settings Wireless Network Name

(SSID) Hide SSID Guest WLAN Security Level Security Mode OK Cancel DESCRIPTION Select Enable Wireless LAN to activate wireless LAN. The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID. Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN. Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool. Select this check box to enable and configure the guest wireless network. Select Basic (WEP) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK, WPA(2)) to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the AMG1312-T Series. After you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen. Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 95 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7.4 The MAC Authentication Screen This screen allows you to configure the AMG1312-T Series to give exclusive access to specific devices (Allow) or exclude specific devices from accessing the AMG1312-T Series (Deny). Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen. Use this screen to view your AMG1312-T Seriess MAC filter settings and add new MAC filter rules. Click Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication. The screen appears as shown. Figure 34 Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 23 Network Setting > Wireless > MAC Authentication LABEL SSID MAC List DESCRIPTION Select the SSID for which you want to configure MAC filter settings. Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table. Select Disable to turn off MAC filtering. Select Allow to permit access to the AMG1312-T Series. MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the AMG1312-T Series. Select Deny to block access to the AMG1312-T Series. MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the AMG1312-T Series. Click this if you want to add a new MAC address entry to the MAC filter list below. Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the AMG1312-T Series in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc. This is the index number of the entry. This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the AMG1312-T Series. Click the Delete icon to delete the entry. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Add new MAC address

MAC Address Modify Apply Cancel 96 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 7.5 The WPS Screen Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your AMG1312-T Series. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection between two devices. Both devices must support WPS. See Section 7.10.8.3 on page 110 for more information about WPS. Note: The AMG1312-T Series applies the security settings configured in the General screen (see Section 7.2 on page 88). If you want to use the WPS feature, make sure you have set the security mode to WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK or No Security. Click Network Setting > Wireless > WPS. The following screen displays. Select Enable and click Apply to activate the WPS function. Then you can configure the WPS settings in this screen. Figure 35 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 24 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS LABEL General WPS DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate WPS on the AMG1312-T Series. Otherwise, select Disable to deactivate WPS. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 97 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 24 Network Setting > Wireless > WPS (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Add a new device with WPS Method Method 1 PBC WPS Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using Push Button Configuration

(PBC). Click this button to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless range of the AMG1312-T Series) to your wireless network. This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device, or a menu button similar to the WPS button on this screen. Note: You must press the other wireless devices WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button. Method 2 PIN Register Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the client into the AMG1312-T Series. Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click Register to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network. You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the devices settings. Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the AMG1312-T Series. WPS Configuration Summary AP PIN The PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the AMG1312-T Series is shown here. Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS. The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method. Click the Generate New PIN button to have the AMG1312-T Series create a new PIN. This displays Configured when the AMG1312-T Series has connected to a wireless network using WPS or Enable WPS is selected and wireless or wireless security settings have been changed. The current wireless and wireless security settings also appear in the screen. This displays Unconfigured if WPS is disabled and there is no wireless or wireless security changes on the AMG1312-T Series or you click Release to remove the configured wireless and wireless security settings. The default WPS status is Configured. Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the AMG1312-T Series. This field displays the AMG1312-T Seriess wireless mode that only allows the compliant WLAN devices to associate with it. This field displays the SSID the AMG1312-T Series is currently using. This field displays the security mode the AMG1312-T Series is currently using. This field displays the pre-shared key the AMG1312-T Series uses when the security mode is set to WPA(2)-PSK. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Status Release Configuration 802.11 Mode SSID Security Pre-Shared Key Apply Cancel 98 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 7.6 The WDS Screen Chapter 7 Wireless LAN An AP using the Wireless Distribution System (WDS) can function as a wireless network bridge allowing you to wirelessly connect wired network segments. The WDS screen allows you to configure the AMG1312-T Series to connect to other APs wirelessly when WDS is enabled. Use this screen to set up your WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links between the AMG1312-T Series and other wireless APs. You need to know the MAC address of the peer device. Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made. Note: WDS security is independent of the security settings between the AMG1312-T Series and any wireless clients. Note: At the time of writing, WDS is compatible with other ZyXEL APs only. Not all models support WDS links. Check your other APs documentation. Click Network Setting > Wireless > WDS. The following screen displays. Figure 36 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 25 Network Setting > Wireless > WDS LABEL WDS Security DESCRIPTION Select the type of the key used to encrypt data between APs. All the wireless APs

(including the AMG1312-T Series) must use the same pre-shared key for data transmission. TKIP AES

Active Remote Bridge MAC Address PSK Apply Cancel The option is available only when you set the security mode to WPA(2) or WPA(2)-

PSK in the Wireless > General screen. Select this to use TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) encryption. Select this to use AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) encryption. This is the index number of the individual WDS link. Select this to activate the link between the AMG1312-T Series and the peer device to which this entry refers. When you do not select the check box this link is down. Type the MAC address of the peer device in a valid MAC address format (six hexadecimal character pairs, for example 12:34:56:78:9a:bc). Enter a Pre-Shared Key (PSK) from 8 to 63 case-sensitive ASCII characters (including spaces and symbols). Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 99 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7.7 The WMM Screen Use this screen to enable WiFi MultiMedia (WMM) and WMM Power Save in wireless networks for multimedia applications. Click Network Setting > Wireless > WMM. The following screen displays. Figure 37 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 26 Network Setting > Wireless > WMM LABEL Enable WMM of SSID1~4 DESCRIPTION Use the checkboxes to determine whether to have the AMG1312-T Series automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends for a wireless network. WMM QoS (WiFi MultiMedia Quality of Service) gives high priority to voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Cancel 7.8 The Scheduling Screen Use the wireless LAN scheduling to configure the days you want to enable or disable the wireless LAN. Click Network Setting > Wireless > Scheduling. The following screen displays. Figure 38 Network Setting > Wireless > Scheduling 100 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen. Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 27 Network Setting > Wireless > Scheduling LABEL Wireless LAN Scheduling State Day Time (24-Hour Format) DESCRIPTION Select Enable or Disable to activate or deactivate wireless LAN scheduling on your AMG1312-T Series. Select On or Off to enable or disable the wireless LAN. Check the day(s) you want to turn the wireless LAN on or off. Specify a time frame during which the schedule would apply. For example, if you set the time range from 12:00 to 23:00, the wireless LAN will be turned on only during this time period. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Cancel 7.9 The Advanced Screen Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings. Click Network Setting > Wireless >

Advanced, the screen appears as shown. See Section 7.10.2 on page 104 for detailed definitions of the terms listed in this screen. Figure 39 Network Setting > Wireless> Advanced The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 28 Network Setting > Wireless> Advanced LABEL Fragmentation Threshold Output Power DESCRIPTION This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256 and 2346. Set the output power of the AMG1312-T Series. If there is a high density of APs in an area, decrease the output power to reduce interference with other APs. Select one of the following: 100%, 75%, 50% or 25%. Select a preamble type from the drop-down list menu. Choices are Long or Short. See the Appendix D on page 268 for more information. Preamble AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 101 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Table 28 Network Setting > Wireless> Advanced (continued) LABEL 802.11 Mode DESCRIPTION Select 802.11b Only to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the AMG1312-T Series. Select 802.11g Only to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the AMG1312-T Series. Select 802.11b+g to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the AMG1312-T Series. The transmission rate of your AMG1312-

T Series might be reduced. Select 802.11n to allow only IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the AMG1312-T Series. Select 802.11g+n to allow either IEEE 802.11g or IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the AMG1312-T Series. The transmission rate of your AMG1312-

T Series might be reduced. Select 802.11b+g+n to allow IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g or IEEE802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the AMG1312-T Series. The transmission rate of your AMG1312-T Series might be reduced. Select whether the AMG1312-T Series uses a wireless channel width of 20MHz or Auto. If Auto is selected, the AMG1312-T Series will use 40MHz if it is supported. A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps. 40MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase throughput. The wireless clients must also support 40 MHz. It is often better to use the 20 MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal. Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding. This field is available only when you set the 802.11 Mode to 802.11n or 802.11b+g+n in the Advanced Setup screen. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Channel Width Apply Cancel 7.10 Wireless LAN Technical Reference This section discusses wireless LANs in depth. For more information, see the appendix. 7.10.1 Wireless Network Overview Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges. A wireless client is a radio connected to a users computer. An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network. A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients, extending a networks range. Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways. 102 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN An infrastructure type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points. An ad-hoc type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange information. The following figure provides an example of a wireless network. Figure 40 Example of a Wireless Network The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B use the access point (AP) to interact with the other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your AMG1312-T Series is the AP. Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines. Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set IDentifier. If two wireless networks overlap, they should use a different channel. Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, to send and receive information. Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP. Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Radio Channels In the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed, civilian use. For the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into numerous channels. This allows a AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 103 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another. When you create a network, you must select a channel to use. Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the number of available channels also varies. 7.10.2 Additional Wireless Terms The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the AMG1312-T Seriess Web Configurator. Table 29 Additional Wireless Terms TERM Preamble DESCRIPTION A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble modes: long and short. If a device uses a different preamble mode than the AMG1312-T Series does, it cannot communicate with the AMG1312-T Series. The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a larger threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy. Authentication Fragmentation Threshold 7.10.3 Wireless Security Overview By their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data networks, this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves, but also join the network. Once an unauthorized person has access to the network, he or she can steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network, or understand the data carried on it. These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that only people presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a key phrase) can access the network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the information sent over the air is encoded. Only people with the code key can understand the information, and only people who have been authenticated are given the code key. These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the old Wired Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at all, but it will not keep a determined attacker out. Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not use them properly. For example, the WPA-PSK security standard is very secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an attackers software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if you use a short key which is very easy to guess - for example, a three-letter word from the dictionary. Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, its not just people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security. Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is in place. A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use obscure information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a way that appears random and does not include real words. For example, if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and 104 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN her favorite movie is Vanishing Point (which you know was made in 1971) you could use 70dodchal71vanpoi as your security key. The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network. 7.10.3.1 SSID Normally, the AMG1312-T Series acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the AMG1312-T Series does not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess. This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network. 7.10.3.2 MAC Address Filter Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters2; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network, see the devices Users Guide or other documentation. You can use the MAC address filter to tell the AMG1312-T Series which devices are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct information. This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the MAC address of an authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network. 7.10.3.3 User Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it. However, every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE 802.1x to do this. For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users. Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network. 1. Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks. These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses. 2. Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 105 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7.10.3.4 Encryption Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot understand the message. The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication. (See Section 7.10.3.3 on page 105 for information about this.) Table 30 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication Weakest NO AUTHENTICATION No Security Static WEP WPA-PSK RADIUS SERVER WPA Strongest WPA2-PSK WPA2 For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK. Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network with the AMG1312-T Series and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA-PSK. Therefore, you should set up Static WEP in the wireless network. Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly. When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your AMG1312-T Series, you can also select an option

(WPA compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the devices support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the WPA compatible option in the AMG1312-T Series. Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key. 7.10.4 Signal Problems Because wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to limitations of distance, interference and absorption. Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference may come from other radio transmissions, such as military or air traffic control communications, or from machines that are coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when physical objects (such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal. 106 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 7.10.5 BSS A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is disabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is enabled, wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. Figure 41 Basic Service set 7.10.6 MBSSID Traditionally, you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service Sets (BSSs). As well as the cost of buying extra APs, there is also the possibility of channel interference. The AMG1312-

T Seriess MBSSID (Multiple Basic Service Set IDentifier) function allows you to use one access point to provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying QoS priorities and/or security modes to different SSIDs. Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP. 7.10.6.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously. You must use different keys for different BSSs. If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs

(they are in different BSSs), but have the same keys, they may hear each others communications (but not communicate with each other). AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 107 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802.1x security. 7.10.7 Wireless Distribution System (WDS) The AMG1312-T Series can act as a wireless network bridge and establish WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links with other APs. You need to know the MAC addresses of the APs you want to link to. Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made. At the time of writing, WDS security is compatible with other ZyXEL access points only. Refer to your other access points documentation for details. The following figure illustrates how WDS link works between APs. Notebook computer A is a wireless client connecting to access point AP 1. AP 1 has no wired Internet connection, but it can establish a WDS link with access point AP 2, which has a wired Internet connection. When AP 1 has a WDS link with AP 2, the notebook computer can access the Internet through AP 2. Figure 42 WDS Link Example A WDS AP 1 AP 2 7.10.8 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) Your AMG1312-T Series supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance. WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each devices documentation to make sure). Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves. 7.10.8.1 Push Button Configuration WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each WPS-enabled device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information. Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button. Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button. 1 Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another. 108 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 7 Wireless LAN 2 3 Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration utility and locate the button (see the devices Users Guide for how to do this - for the AMG1312-T Series, see Section 7.6 on page 99). Press the button on one of the devices (it doesnt matter which). For the AMG1312-T Series you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds. 4 Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name

(SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee. If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. 7.10.8.2 PIN Configuration Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface). Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method. When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client) into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network. Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router

(referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices. Access the WPS section of the APs configuration interface. See the devices Users Guide for how to do this. Look for the clients WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the WPS section of the clients configuration interface (see the devices Users Guide for how to find the WPS PIN - for the AMG1312-T Series, see Section 7.5 on page 97). Enter the clients PIN in the APs configuration interface. If the client devices configuration interface has an area for entering another devices PIN, you can either enter the clients PIN in the AP, or enter the APs PIN in the client - it does not matter which. Start WPS on both devices within two minutes. 7 Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself. 8 On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect, WPS was successful. If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the APs configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 109 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method. Figure 43 Example WPS Process: PIN Method ENROLLEE REGISTRAR WPS This devices WPS PIN: 123456 WPS Enter WPS PIN from other device:

WPS WPS START START WITHIN 2 MINUTES SECURE EAP TUNNEL SSID WPA(2)-PSK COMMUNICATION 7.10.8.3 How WPS Works When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role. One device acts as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a secure EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is already part of a network, it sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly. The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a WPS-enabled access point. 110 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 44 How WPS works ACTIVATE WPS WITHIN 2 MINUTES ACTIVATE WPS Chapter 7 Wireless LAN ENROLLEE WPS HANDSHAKE SECURE TUNNEL SECURITY INFO COMMUNICATION REGISTRAR The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary. The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device. Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients. By default, a WPS devices is unconfigured. This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes configured. A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset it to its factory defaults. 7.10.8.4 Example WPS Network Setup This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup. The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1 is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 111 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN Figure 45 WPS: Example Network Step 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 1 SECURITY INFO REGISTRAR AP1 In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2. Figure 46 WPS: Example Network Step 2 REGISTRAR AP1 EXISTING CONNECTION O F Y I N R I T U C E S CLIENT 1 ENROLLEE CLIENT 2 In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access point. However, you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead. 112 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 47 WPS: Example Network Step 3 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN CLIENT 1 REGISTRAR CLIENT 2 EXISTING CONNECTION N T I O C E N N O G C T I N X I S E SECURITY INFO AP1 ENROLLEE AP2 7.10.8.5 Limitations of WPS WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware. WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP). When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other. For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way. WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS. WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK). When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the correct enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network. You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not have access to the network. If this happens, open the access points configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 113 Chapter 7 Wireless LAN access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients (usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If there is an unknown MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP. 114 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide CHAPTER 8 Home Networking 8.1 Overview A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many networking devices are connected. It is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building. Use the LAN screens to help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses. LAN DSL 8.1.1 What You Can Do in the LAN Screens Use the LAN Setup screen to set the LAN IP address, subnet mask, and DHCP settings of your AMG1312-T Series (Section 8.2 on page 117). Use the Static DHCP screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses (Section 8.3 on page 119). Use the IP Alias screen (Section 8.4 on page 120) to change your AMG1312-T Seriess IP alias settings. Use the UPnP screen to enable UPnP and UPnP NAT traversal on the AMG1312-T Series (Section 8.5 on page 121). Use the IPv6 LAN Setup screen (Section 8.6 on page 122) to configure the IPv6 settings on your AMG1312-T Seriess LAN interface. Use the File Sharing screen to enable file-sharing server (Section 8.7 on page 125). AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 115 Chapter 8 Home Networking 8.1.2 What You Need To Know 8.1.2.1 About LAN IP Address IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts. Subnet Mask Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. DHCP A DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server can assign your AMG1312-T Series an IP address, subnet mask, DNS and other routing information when it's turned on. DNS DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a networking device before you can access it. 8.1.2.2 About UPnP Identifying UPnP Devices UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder (Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device. NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:

Dynamic port mapping Learning public IP addresses Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP. See the Chapter 11 on page 147 for more information on NAT. 116 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments. When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the AMG1312-T Series allows multicast messages on the LAN only. All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention. UPnP and ZyXEL Sexual has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum UPnP Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports Internet Gateway Device (IGD) 1.0. Finding Out More See Section 8.8 on page 128 for technical background information on LANs. 8.1.3 Before You Begin Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen. 8.2 The LAN Setup Screen Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address, subnet mask and advanced networking settings such as RIP, multicast of your AMG1312-T Series. Click Network Setting > Home Networking to open the LAN Setup screen. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 117 Chapter 8 Home Networking Figure 48 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 31 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup LABEL LAN IP Setup IP Address DESCRIPTION Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your AMG1312-T Series in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default). Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example 255.255.255.0 (factory default). Your AMG1312-T Series automatically computes the subnet mask based on the IP Address you enter, so do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so. RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. Select the RIP version from RIP1 and RIP2. Use this field to control how much routing information the VDSL Router sends and receives on the subnet. Select the RIP Direction from None, Both, IN Only and OUT Only. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group. The AMG1312-T Series supports IGMP v1/IGMP v2/IGMP v3. Select None to disable it. Select Enabled to activate IGMP Snooping. This allows the AMG1312-T Series to passively learn memberships in multicast groups. Otherwise, select Disabled to deactivate it. Subnet Mask Dynamic Route Direction Multicast IGMP Snooping DHCP Server State 118 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 31 Network Setting > Home Networking > LAN Setup (continued) LABEL DHCP DESCRIPTION If set to Enable, your AMG1312-T Series can assign IP addresses, an IP default gateway and DNS servers to Windows 95, Windows NT and other systems that support the DHCP client. If set to Disable, the DHCP server will be disabled. If set to DHCP Relay, the AMG1312-T Series acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients. Enter the IP address of the actual, remote DHCP server in the Remote DHCP Server field in this case. When DHCP is used, the following items need to be set:

IP Addressing Values Beginning IP Address This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool. Pool Size DHCP Server Lease Time Lease Time This field specifies the size, or count of the IP address pool. This field specifies the lease time in seconds of an IP address assigned by the DHCP server. DNS Values DNS DNS Server 1/2 Apply Cancel Advanced Setup Select Dynamic to have the AMG1312-T Series pass a DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address to the DHCP clients. Select Static and enter the DNS server IP address(es) in the fields below, if you know the IP address. Enter the IP address of your primary/secondary DNS server. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Click this to display the Advanced LAN Setup screen and edit more details of your LAN setup. 8.3 The Static DHCP Screen This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses. Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. Use this screen to change your AMG1312-T Seriess static DHCP settings. Click Network Setting >

Home Networking > Static DHCP to open the following screen. Figure 49 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 119 Chapter 8 Home Networking The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 32 Network Setting > Home Networking > Static DHCP LABEL Add new static lease Click this to add a new static DHCP entry.

Active MAC Address This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the client is connected to the AMG1312-T Series. The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local Area Network) is unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation). IP Address Modify A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address. This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above. Click the Edit icon to have the IP address field editable and change it. Click the Delete icon to delete a static DHCP entry. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the selected entry. If you click Add new static lease in the Static DHCP screen or the Edit icon next to a static DHCP entry, the following screen displays. Figure 50 Static DHCP: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 33 Static DHCP: Add/Edit LABEL MAC Address DESCRIPTION If you select Manual Input in the Select Device Info field, enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN. If you select Manual Input in the Select Device Info field, enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. IP Address OK Cancel 8.4 The IP Alias Screen IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface. The AMG1312-T Series supports multiple logical LAN interfaces via its physical Ethernet interface with the AMG1312-T Series itself as the gateway for the LAN network. 120 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking When you use IP alias, you can also configure firewall rules to control access to the LAN's logical network (subnet). 8.4.1 Configuring the LAN IP Alias Screen Use this screen to change your AMG1312-T Seriess IP alias settings. Click Network Setting >

Home Networking > IP Alias to open the following screen. Figure 51 Network Setting > Home Networking > IP Alias The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 34 Network Setting > Home Networking > IP Alias LABEL IP Alias IP Address IP Subnet Mask DESCRIPTION Select Enable to configure a LAN network for the AMG1312-T Series. Enter the IP address of your AMG1312-T Series in dotted decimal notation. Your AMG1312-T Series will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign. Unless you are implementing subnetting, use the subnet mask computed by the AMG1312-T Series. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Cancel 8.5 The UPnP Screen Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use. See page 116 for more information on UPnP. Use the following screen to enable or disable the UPnP function on your AMG1312-T Series. Click Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP to display the screen shown next. Figure 52 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 121 Chapter 8 Home Networking The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 35 Network Setting > Home Networking > UPnP LABEL UPnP DESCRIPTION Select Enable to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the AMG1312-T Series's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator). Otherwise, select Disable to deactivate UPnP. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. Apply Cancel 8.6 The IPv6 LAN Setup Screen Use this screen to configure the IPv6 settings for your AMG1312-T Seriess LAN interface. See Appendix E on page 277 for background information about IPv6. Figure 53 Network Setting > Home Networking > IPv6 LAN Setup 122 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen. Chapter 8 Home Networking Select Manual to manually enter a link local address. Select EUI64 to use the EUI-64 format to generate a link local address from the Ethernet MAC address. DESCRIPTION Table 36 Network Setting > Home Networking > IPv6 LAN Setup LABEL IPv6 LAN Setup Link Local Address Type IPv6 Address Prefix MLD Snooping Lan Global Identifier Type Lan Identifier If you selected Manual in the Link Local Address Type field, enter the LAN IPv6 address you want to assign to your AMG1312-T Series in hexadecimal notation, for example, fe80::1 (factory default). Enter the address prefix to specify how many most significant bits in an IPv6 address compose the network address. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD hosts who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network. Select Enabled to activate MLD Snooping on the AMG1312-T Series. This allows the AMG1312-T Series to check MLD packets passing through it and learn the multicast group membership. It helps reduce multicast traffic. Select Manual to manually enter a LAN Identifier as the interface ID to identify the LAN interface. The LAN Identifier is appended to the IPv6 address prefix to create the routable global IPv6 address. Select EUI64 to use the EUI-64 format to generate an interface ID from the Ethernet MAC address. If you selected Manual, enter the LAN Identifier in this field. The LAN identifier should be unique and 64 bits in hexadecimal form. Every 16 bit block should be separated by a colon as in XXXX:XXXX:XXXX:XXXX where X is a hexadecimal character. Blocks of zeros can be represented with double colons as in XXXX:XXXX::XXXX. LAN IPv6 Address Setting Delegate prefix from WAN Static Select this option to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the service provider or an uplink router. Select this option to configure a fixed IPv6 address for the AMG1312-T Seriess LAN IPv6 address. If you select static IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 address prefix that the AMG1312-T Series uses for the LAN IPv6 address. If you select static IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 prefix length that the AMG1312-T Series uses to generate the LAN IPv6 address. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (starting from the left) in the address compose the network address. This field displays the bit number of the IPv6 subnet mask. Enter the preferred lifetime for the prefix. Enter the valid lifetime for the prefix. Static IPv6 Address Prefix Prefix length Preferred Lifetime Valid Lifetime RADVD Setup AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 123 Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 36 Network Setting > Home Networking > IPv6 LAN Setup (continued) LABEL Send RA on DESCRIPTION Select this to have the AMG1312-T Series send router advertisement messages to the LAN hosts. Router advertisement is a response to a router solicitation or a periodical multicast advertisement from a router to advertise its presence and other parameters, such as IPv6 prefix and DNS information. Router solicitation is a request from a host to locate a router that can act as the default router and forward packets. Note: The LAN hosts neither generate global IPv6 addresses nor communicate with other networks if you disable this feature. Select this to have the AMG1312-T Series obtain the M/O (Managed/Other) flag setting from the service provider or uplink router. Select this to specify the M/O flag setting manually. Select this to have the AMG1312-T Series indicate to hosts to obtain network settings

(such as prefix and DNS settings) through DHCPv6. Clear this to have the AMG1312-T Series indicate to hosts that DHCPv6 is not available and they should use the prefix in the router advertisement message. Select this to have the AMG1312-T Series indicate to hosts to obtain DNS information through DHCPv6. Clear this to have the AMG1312-T Series indicate to hosts that DNS information is not available in this network. Select this to have the Router Advertisement messages the VDSL Router sends specify the allowed interval between Router Advertisement messages. Enter the maximum number of network segments that a packet can cross before reaching the destination. When forwarding an IPv6 packet, IPv6 routers are required to decrease the Hop Limit by 1 and to discard the IPv6 packet when the Hop Limit is 0. Possible value for this field are 0-255. Enter the time in seconds that hosts should consider the AMG1312-T Series to be the default router. Possible values for this field are 0-9000. Select the router preference (Low, Medium or High) for the AMG1312-T Series. The AMG1312-T Series sends this preference in the router advertisements to tell hosts what preference they should use for the AMG1312-T Series. This helps hosts to choose their default router especially when there are multiple IPv6 router in the network. Delegate M/O flag from WAN Manual Managed config flag on Other config flag on Advertisem ent interval option on Hop limit Router Lifetime Router Preference Note: Make sure the hosts also support router preference to make this function work. Enter the time in milliseconds that can elapse before a neighbor is detected. Possible values for this field are 0-3600000. Enter the time in milliseconds between neighbor solicitation packet retransmissions. Possible values for this field are 1000-4294967295. Reachable Time (ms) Retrans Timer (ms) RA Interval Enter the time in seconds between router advertisement messages. Possible values for this field are 4-1800. Select this to have the AMG1312-T Series obtain the MTU setting from the service provider or uplink router. Select this to specify the MTU manually. The Maximum Transmission Unit. Type the maximum size of each IPv6 data packet, in bytes, that can move through this interface. If a larger packet arrives, the AMG1312-T Series divides it into smaller fragments. Delegate MTU from WAN Manual MTU 124 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 36 Network Setting > Home Networking > IPv6 LAN Setup (continued) LABEL DAD attempts DESCRIPTION Specify the number of DAD (Duplicate Address Detection) attempts before an IPv6 address is assigned to the AMG1312-T Series LAN interface. Possible values for this field are 1-7. DHCPv6 DHCPv6 Server DNSv6 Mode Primary DNS Secondary DNS Informatio n refresh time Apply Cancel Use this field to Enable or Disable DHCPv6 server on the AMG1312-T Series. Select the DNS role (Proxy or Relay) that you want the AMG1312-T Series to act in the IPv6 LAN network. Alternatively, select Manual and specify the DNS servers IPv6 address in the fields below. This field is available if you choose Manual as the DNSv6 mode. Enter the first DNS server IPv6 address the AMG1312-T Series passes to the DHCP clients. This field is available if you choose Manual as the DNSv6 mode. Enter the second DNS server IPv6 address the AMG1312-T Series passes to the DHCP clients. Enter the number of seconds a DHCPv6 client should wait before refreshing information retrieved from DHCPv6. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 8.7 The File Sharing Screen Use this screen to set up file sharing through the AMG1312-T Series. The AMG1312-T Seriess LAN users can access the shared folder (or share) from the USB device inserted in the AMG1312-T Series. To access this screen, click Network Setting > Home Networking > File Sharing. Figure 54 Network Setting > Home Networking > File Sharing AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 125 Chapter 8 Home Networking Each field is described in the following table. DESCRIPTION Table 37 Network Setting > Home Networking > File Sharing LABEL Server Configuration Active the File Sharing Services (SMB) Share Directory Access Level Select Public to allow all users on the network to access the shared files. Select Security to require users to log in to access shared files. Select Active the File Sharing Services (SMB) to activate file sharing through the AMG1312-T Series. Account Management

Status This field shows the number of the user. This field shows the status of the user.

: The user account is not activated for the share.

: The user account is activated for the share. User Name Modify This is the name of a user who is allowed to access the secured shares on the USB device. Click the Edit icon to modify the user account. Apply Cancel Click the Delete icon to remove the user account from the AMG1312-T Series. Click this to save your changes to the AMG1312-T Series. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 8.7.1 The User Edit Screen Use this screen to edit an user. To access this screen, click the Edit button in the Network Setting

> Home Networking > File Sharing screen. Figure 55 Network Setting > Home Networking > File Sharing > Edit 126 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Each field is described in the following table. Chapter 8 Home Networking Table 38 Network Setting > Home Networking > File Sharing > Edit LABEL Active User Name New Password Retype New Password Apply Cancel DESCRIPTION Select Active to edit user file sharing through the AMG1312-T Series. Type in the user name of 5 to 15 keyboard characters in length. Type in the new password of 5 to 15 keyboard characters in length. Retype the new password of 5 to 15 keyboard characters in length. Click this to save your changes to the AMG1312-T Series. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 127 Chapter 8 Home Networking 8.8 Home Networking Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 8.8.1 LANs, WANs and the AMG1312-T Series The actual physical connection determines whether the AMG1312-T Series ports are LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next. Figure 56 LAN and WAN IP Addresses LAN WAN 8.8.2 DHCP Setup DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the AMG1312-T Series as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the AMG1312-T Series provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured. IP Pool Setup The AMG1312-T Series is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool). Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers. 8.8.3 DNS Server Addresses DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask. There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses. The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in the DHCP Setup screen. 128 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of IPCP (IP Control Protocol) after the connection is up. If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS servers, chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation. The AMG1312-T Series supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature. Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions. It does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers, make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the DHCP Setup screen. 8.8.4 LAN TCP/IP The AMG1312-T Series has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability. IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number. Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the AMG1312-T Series. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network. Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your AMG1312-T Series, but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your AMG1312-T Series will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the AMG1312-T Series unless you are instructed to do otherwise. Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:

10.0.0.0 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 172.31.255.255 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 129 Chapter 8 Home Networking 192.168.0.0 192.168.255.255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address;

always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. 8.8.5 RIP Setup RIP (Routing Information Protocol) allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers. The RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets. When set to:

Both - the AMG1312-T Series will broadcast its routing table periodically and incorporate the RIP information that it receives. In Only - the AMG1312-T Series will not send any RIP packets but will accept all RIP packets received. Out Only - the AMG1312-T Series will send out RIP packets but will not accept any RIP packets received. None - the AMG1312-T Series will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received. The Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the AMG1312-T Series sends (it recognizes both formats when receiving). RIP-1 is universally supported; but RIP-2 carries more information. RIP-1 is probably adequate for most networks, unless you have an unusual network topology. Both RIP-2B and RIP-2M sends the routing data in RIP-2 format; the difference being that RIP-2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP-2M uses multicasting. Multicasting can reduce the load on non-router machines since they generally do not listen to the RIP multicast address and so will not receive the RIP packets. However, if one router uses multicasting, then all routers on your network must use multicasting, also. 8.8.6 Multicast Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network). Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just 1. IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. IGMP version 2 (RFC 2236) is an improvement over version 1 (RFC 1112) but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use. IGMP version 3 supports source filtering, reporting or ignoring traffic from specific source address to a particular host on the network. If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1, please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236. The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The address 224.0.0.0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers. The address 130 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 8 Home Networking 224.0.0.1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts

(including gateways). All hosts must join the 224.0.0.1 group in order to participate in IGMP. The address 224.0.0.2 is assigned to the multicast routers group. At start up, the AMG1312-T Series queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership. After that, the AMG1312-T Series periodically updates this information. IP multicasting can be enabled/disabled on the AMG1312-T Series LAN and/or WAN interfaces in the web configurator (LAN; WAN). Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 131 CHAPTER 9 Static Route 9.1 Overview The AMG1312-T Series usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the AMG1312-T Series send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes. For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the AMG1312-T Seriess LAN interface. The AMG1312-T Series routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the AMG1312-T Seriess default gateway (R1). You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN. Figure 57 Example of Static Routing Topology A R3 LAN WAN R1 R2 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 132 9.1.1 What You Can Do in the Static Route Screens Use the Static Route screens (Section 9.2 on page 133) to view and configure IP static routes on the AMG1312-T Series. Use the IPv6 Static Route screens (Section 9.3 on page 134) to view and configure IPv6 static routes on the AMG1312-T Series. Chapter 9 Static Route 9.2 The Static Route Screen Use this screen to view the static route rules. Click Network Setting > Static Route to open the Static Route screen. Figure 58 Network Setting > Static Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 39 Network Setting > Static Route LABEL Add new static route

Destination IP DESCRIPTION Click this to configure a new static route. This is the number of an individual static route. This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination. This is the number of transmission hops between this AMG1312-T Series and the destination. Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can set up a static route on the AMG1312-T Series. Gateway Subnet Mask Metric Modify Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the AMG1312-T Series. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route. 9.2.1 Static Route Add/Edit Use this screen to add or edit a static route. Click Add new Static Route Entry in the Routing screen or the Edit icon next to the static route you want to edit. The screen shown next appears. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 133 Chapter 9 Static Route Figure 59 Network Setting > Static Route Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 40 Network Setting > Static Route Add/Edit LABEL Destination IP Address DESCRIPTION This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID. Enter the IP subnet mask here. Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations. Enter the number of transmission hops (routers) that need to cross from the AMG1312-T Series to the destination. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Metric OK Cancel 9.3 IPv6 Static Route Use this screen to view the IPv6 static route rules. Click Network Setting > Static Route > IPv6 Static Route to open the IPv6 Static Route screen. Figure 60 Network Setting > Static Route > IPv6 Static Route The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 41 Network Setting > Static Route > IPv6 Static Route LABEL Add new static route

DESCRIPTION Click this to configure a new IPv6 static route. This is the number of an individual static route. 134 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 9 Static Route Table 41 Network Setting > Static Route > IPv6 Static Route (continued) LABEL Destination DESCRIPTION This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (starting from the left) in the address compose the network address. This field displays the bit number of the IPv6 subnet mask. This specifies the LAN or WAN PVC. Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can set up a static route on the AMG1312-T Series. Prefix Length Device Modify Click the Remove icon to remove a static route from the AMG1312-T Series. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route. 9.3.1 IPv6 Static Route Edit Use this screen to configure the required information for an IPv6 static route. Click Add new static route or select an IPv6 static route index number and click Edit. The screen shown next appears. Figure 61 Network Setting > Static Route > IPv6 Static Route: Add/Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 42 Network Setting > Static Route > IPv6 Static Route: Add/Edit LABEL Destination IPv6 Address DESCRIPTION This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination. Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a prefix length of 128 in the prefix length field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID. IPv6 Prefix Length Enter the address prefix to specify how many most significant bits compose the network address. PVC IPv6 Address Select the interface through which the traffic is routed. OK Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 135 CHAPTER 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.1 Overview Use the QoS screen to set up your AMG1312-T Series to use QoS for traffic management. Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a networks ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to control bandwidth. QoS allows the AMG1312-T Series to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network performance. Without QoS, all traffic data are equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical applications such as video-on-demand. The AMG1312-T Series assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets assigned with a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priorities if there is congestion, allowing time-sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both those that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter

(variations in delay) such as Voice over IP (VoIP) or Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video. In the following figure, your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 50 Mbps. You configure a classifier to assign the highest priority queue (6) to VoIP traffic from the LAN interface, so that voice traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion. Traffic from the bosss IP address (192.168.1.23 for example) is mapped to queue 5. Traffic that does not match these two classes are assigned priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on the AMG1312-T Series. Figure 62 QoS Example VoIP: Queue 6 Boss: Queue 5 IP=192.168.1.23 DSL 50 Mbps 10.1.1 What You Can Do in the QoS Screens Use the General screen (Section 10.2 on page 137) to enable QoS on the AMG1312-T Series, and specify the type of scheduling. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 136 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Use the Queue screen (Section 10.3 on page 138) to configure QoS settings on the AMG1312-T Series. Use the Class Setup screen (Section 10.4 on page 140) to configure QoS settings on the AMG1312-T Series. Use the Game List screen (Section 10.5 on page 144) to give priority to traffic for specific games. 10.1.2 What You Need to Know About QoS 802.1p QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given the same priority. 802.1p is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use 802.1p to give different priorities to different packet types. Tagging and Marking In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) value and IEEE 802.1p priority level in a matched packet. When the packet passes through a compatible network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker. Finding Out More See Section 10.6 on page 145 for advanced technical information on QoS. 10.2 The Quality of Service General Screen Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth. Click Network Setting > QoS > General to open the screen as shown next. Figure 63 Network Setting > QoS > General AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 137 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 43 Network Setting > QoS > General LABEL Active QoS Traffic priority will be automatically assigned by DESCRIPTION Use this field to turn on QoS to improve your network performance. Select how the AMG1312-T Series assigns priorities to various incoming and outgoing traffic flows. None: Disables auto priority mapping and has the AMG1312-T Series put packets into the queues according to your classification rules. Traffic which does not match any of the classification rules is mapped into the default queue with the lowest priority. Ethernet Priority: Automatically assign priority based on the IEEE 802.1p priority level. IP Precedence: Automatically assign priority based on the first three bits of the TOS field in the IP header. Packet Length: Automatically assign priority based on the packet size. Smaller packets get higher priority since control, signaling, VoIP, internet gaming, or other real-time packets are usually small while larger packets are usually best effort data packets like file transfers. Apply Cancel Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 10.3 The Queue Screen Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment disciplines and priorities. Click Network Setting > QoS > Queue to open the screen as shown next. Figure 64 Network Setting > QoS > Queue The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 44 Network Setting > QoS > Queue LABEL

Status DESCRIPTION This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the queue is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this queue is active. A gray bulb signifies that this queue is not active. This shows the descriptive name of this queue. This shows the name of the AMG1312-T Seriess interface through which traffic in this queue passes. This shows the priority of this queue. This shows the weight of this queue. Name Interface Priority Weight 138 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 44 Network Setting > QoS > Queue (continued) LABEL Rate Limit Modify DESCRIPTION This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue. Click the Edit icon to edit the queue. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing queue. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. 10.3.1 Adding a QoS Queue Click the edit icon in the Queue Setup screen to configure a queue. Figure 65 Queue Setup: Edit The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 45 Queue Setup: Edit LABEL Active Name Interface DESCRIPTION Select to enable or disable this queue. Enter the descriptive name of this queue. Select the interface to which this queue is applied. Priority Weight Rate Limit OK Cancel This field is read-only if you are editing the queue. Select the priority level (from 1 to 3) of this queue. The smaller the number, the higher the priority level. Traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is congested. Select the weight (from 1 to 8) of this queue. If two queues have the same priority level, the AMG1312-T Series divides the bandwidth across the queues according to their weights. Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than queues with smaller weights. Specify the maximum transmission rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic on this queue. Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 139 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.4 The Class Setup Screen Use this screen to add, edit or delete QoS classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number, destination port number or incoming interface. For example, you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to form a flow. You can give different priorities to traffic that the AMG1312-T Series forwards out through the WAN interface. Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications. Click Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup to open the screen as shown next. Figure 66 Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 46 Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup LABEL Add new Classifier Click this to create a new classifier. Index Status This is the index number of the entry. This field displays whether the classifier is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this classifier is active. A gray bulb signifies that this classifier is not active. This shows the interface from which traffic of this class should come. This shows criteria specified in this classifier, for example the type and the source MAC address of traffic that matches this classifier. This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier. This is the IEEE 802.1p priority level and 802.1Q VLAN tag assigned to traffic of this classifier. This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put. Click the Edit icon to edit the classifier. From Interface Classification Criteria DSCP Mark 802.1P/1Q Mark To Queue Modify Click the Delete icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action. 10.4.1 Class Setup Add/Edit Click Add new Classifier in the Network Setting > QoS > Class Setup screen or click the Edit icon next to a class, the screen appears as shown next. 140 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 67 QoS > Class Setup Add/Edit Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 141 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Select the rules index number from the drop-down list box. Table 47 QoS > Class Setup Add/Edit LABEL Rule Index Class Configuration Active Ether Type Use this field to enable or disable the QoS class rule. Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic. If you select IPv4 or IPv6, you also need to configure source or destination IP address, MAC address, DHCP options, DSCP value or the protocol type. If you select ARP, you also need to configure source or destination MAC address. Interface To Queue If you select 802.1Q, you can configure an 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID. Select an interface if you want to classify the traffic received by it. Select a queue that applies to this class. You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already. Criteria Configuration Basic From Interface If you select From LAN in the Interface field, you can select specific interface(s) from which traffic is received. ra0 ~ ra3 means wireless interfaces WLAN0 to WLAN3. If you select From WAN in the Interface field, you can select a specific WAN connection

(PVC0~PVC2) from which traffic is received. Source IP Address Subnet Netmask/

Source Prefix Length Port Range MAC Address Mac Netmask Exclude Destination IP Address Subnet Netmask/

Destination Prefix Length Port Range MAC Address Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank IP address means any source IP address. Enter the source subnet mask if you select IPv4 as the Ether Type. Enter the source prefix length if you select IPv6 as the Ether Type. If you select TCP/UDP, TCP or UDP in the IP protocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source. Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet. Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packets MAC address should match. Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffics MAC address should match. Enter 0 for the bit(s) of the matched traffics MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank IP address means any destination IP address. Enter the destination subnet mask if you select IPv4 as the Ether Type. Enter the destination prefix length if you select IPv6 as the Ether Type. If you select TCP/UDP, TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source. Select the check box and enter the destination MAC address of the packet. 142 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 47 QoS > Class Setup Add/Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packets MAC address should match. Enter f for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffics MAC address should match. Enter 0 for the bit(s) of the matched traffics MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to 00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria. Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. Mac Netmask Exclude Others IP Protocol This field is available only when you select IPv4 or IPv6 in the Ether Type field. If you select IPv4, select this option and select the protocol (service type) from TCP/

UDP, TCP, UDP or ICMP.If you select IPv6, select this option and select the protocol

(service type) from TCP/UDP, TCP, UDP or ICMPv6. This field is available only when you select TCP in the IP protocol field. TCP ACK If you select this option, the matched TCP packets must contain the ACK (Acknowledge) flag. This field is available only when you select IPv4 or IPv6 in the Ether Type field. Packet Length IPP/DS Field IP Precedence Range Type of Service DSCP Range 802.1P Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length (from 46 to 1500) in the fields provided. Select IPP/TOS to specify an IP precedence range and type of services. Select DSCP to specify a DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) range. Enter a range from 0 to 7 for IP precedence. 0 is the lowest priority and 7 is the highest. Select a type of service from the drop-down list box. Available options are: Normal service, Minimize delay, Maximize throughput, Maximize reliability and Minimize monetary cost. Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the field provided. Select this option and select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from the drop-down list box. VLAN ID Exclude Action Forward To

"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest. Select this option and enter the source VLAN ID in this field. Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier. Select the interface through which traffic that matches the rule is forwarded out. If you select Unchange, the AMG1312-T Series forwards traffic of this class according to the default routing table. If traffic of this class comes from a WAN interface and is in a queue that forwards traffic through the LAN/WLAN interface, the AMG1312-T Series ignores the setting here. Select IPP/TOS to specify an IP precedence range and type of services. IPP/DS Field IP Precedence Mark Select DSCP to specify a DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) range. Enter a range from 0 to 7 to re-assign IP precedence to matched traffic. 0 is the lowest priority and 7 is the highest. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 143 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) Table 47 QoS > Class Setup Add/Edit (continued) LABEL DESCRIPTION Select a type of service to re-assign the priority level to matched traffic. Type Of Service Mark DSCP Mark(0~63) 802.1Q Tag OK Cancel Available options are: Normal service, Minimize delay, Maximize throughput, Maximize reliability and Minimize monetary cost. This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field. If you select Mark, enter a DSCP value with which the AMG1312-T Series replaces the DSCP field in the packets. If you select Unchange, the AMG1312-T Series keep the DSCP field in the packets. If you select Remark, select a priority level (in the Ethernet Priority field) and enter a VLAN ID number (in the VLAN ID field) with which the AMG1312-T Series replaces the IEEE 802.1p priority field and VLAN ID of the frames. If you select Remove, the AMG1312-T Series deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before forwarding them out. If you select Add, the AMG1312-T Series treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second priority level and VLAN ID that you specify in the Ethernet Priority and VLAN ID fields. If you select Same, the AMG1312-T Series keep the Ethernet Priority and VLAN ID in the packets. To configure the Ethernet Priority, you can either select a priority number in the first drop-down list box (7 is the highest and 0 is the lowest priority) or select an application from the second drop-down list box which automatically maps to the corresponding priority number. (Key Net Traffic: 7; Voice: 6; Video: 5;IGMP: 4; Key Data: 3) Click OK to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 10.5 The QoS Game List Screen Use this screen to give priority to traffic for specific games. Click Network Setting > QoS > Game List to open the screen as shown next. Figure 68 Network Setting > QoS > Game List 144 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 48 Network Setting > QoS > Game List LABEL Enable Game List DESCRIPTION Select this to have QoS give the highest priority to traffic for the games you specify. This priority is higher than the other QoS queues. Apply Cancel Select the games below. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore previously saved settings. 10.6 QoS Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 10.6.1 IEEE 802.1p IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates the 802.1p). Table 49 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type PRIORITY LEVEL Level 7 Level 6 TRAFFIC TYPE Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages. Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay). Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter. Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA (Systems Network Architecture) transactions. Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay. This is for spare bandwidth. This is typically used for non-critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users. Typically used for best-effort traffic. Level 5 Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1 Level 0 10.6.2 IP Precedence Similar to IEEE 802.1p prioritization at layer-2, you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a layer-3 network. IP precedence uses three bits of the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. There are eight classes of services (ranging from zero to seven) in IP precedence. Zero is the lowest priority level and seven is the highest. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 145 Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS) 10.6.3 Automatic Priority Queue Assignment If you enable QoS on the AMG1312-T Series, the AMG1312-T Series can automatically base on the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP precedence and/or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class. The following table shows you the internal layer-2 and layer-3 QoS mapping on the AMG1312-T Series. On the AMG1312-T Series, traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested. Table 50 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping PRIORITY QUEUE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LAYER 2 IEEE 802.1P USER PRIORITY

(ETHERNET PRIORITY) 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 LAYER 3 TOS (IP PRECEDENCE) DSCP IP PACKET LENGTH (BYTE)

>1100 250~1100

<250 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 000000 000000 001110 001100 001010 001000 010110 010100 010010 010000 011110 011100 011010 011000 100110 100100 100010 100000 101110 101000 110000 111000 146 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide CHAPTER 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) 11.1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the AMG1312-T Series. NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network. 11.1.1 What You Can Do in the NAT Screens Use the General screen (Section 11.2 on page 148) to activate/deactivate NAT for the default WAN connection (PVC0). Use the Port Forwarding screen (Section 11.3 on page 149) to configure forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. Use the DMZ screen to configure a default server (Section 11.4 on page 152). Use the ALG screen to enable and disable the NAT and SIP (VoIP) ALG in the AMG1312-T Series Section 11.5 on page 152). 11.1.2 What You Need To Know About NAT Inside/Outside Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the AMG1312-T Series, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/Local Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. NAT In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber

(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 147 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Port Forwarding A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make visible to the outside world even though NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world. Finding Out More See Section 11.6 on page 153 for advanced technical information on NAT. 11.2 The NAT General Screen Use this screen to activate NAT for the default WAN connection (PVC0). Click Network Setting >

NAT to open the following screen. Note: You must create an IP filter rule in addition to setting up NAT, to allow traffic from the WAN to be forwarded through the AMG1312-T Series. Figure 69 Network Setting > NAT > General The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 51 Network Setting > NAT > General LABEL Active Max NAT/Firewall Session Per User DESCRIPTION Select this check box to enable NAT. When computers use peer to peer applications, such as file sharing applications, they need to establish NAT sessions. If you do not limit the number of NAT sessions a single client can establish, this can result in all of the available NAT sessions being used. In this case, no additional NAT sessions can be established, and users may not be able to access the Internet. Each NAT session establishes a corresponding firewall session. Use this field to limit the number of NAT/Firewall sessions client computers can establish through the AMG1312-T Series. If your network has a small number of clients using peer to peer applications, you can raise this number to ensure that their performance is not degraded by the number of NAT sessions they can establish. If your network has a large number of users using peer to peer applications, you can lower this number to ensure no single client is exhausting all of the available NAT sessions. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Apply Cancel 148 11.3 The Port Forwarding Screen Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Use this screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network. You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports. The most often used port numbers and services are shown in Appendix F on page 286. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP. Default Server IP Address In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen. Note: If you do not assign a Default Server IP address, the AMG1312-T Series discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup. Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example) Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet. Figure 70 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example A=192.168.1.33 LAN WAN B=192.168.1.34 192.168.1.1 IP Address assigned by ISP C=192.168.1.35 D=192.168.1.36 11.3.1 Configuring the Port Forwarding Screen Click Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding to open the following screen. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 149 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) See Appendix F on page 286 for port numbers commonly used for particular services. Note: Make sure NAT is activated on the WAN connection before you configure a port forwarding rule for it. For the default WAN connection (PVC0), activate NAT in the Network Setting > NAT > General screen. For other WAN connections

(PVC1~PVC7), activate NAT for an individual WAN connection in the Broadband >

More Connections > Edit screen. Figure 71 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 52 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding LABEL WAN Interface DESCRIPTION Select a WAN connection for which you want to configure a port forwarding rule. A 3G option is available only when you enable the 3G backup function. Click this button to add a rule to the table below. This is the rule index number (read-only). This field indicates whether the rule is active or not. Add new rule

Active Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it. This is a services name. Service Name External Start Port This is the first port number of a port range that incoming service requests may use to External End Port Internal Start Port Internal End Port Server IP Address Modify access the service in your local network. This is the last port number of a port range that incoming service requests may use to access the service in your local network. This is the starting port number that the device translates for the service in your local network. This is the ending port number that the device translates for the service in your local network. This is the servers IP address in your local network. Click the edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the port forwarding rule. Click the delete icon to delete an existing port forwarding rule. Note that subsequent address mapping rules move up by one when you take this action. 11.3.2 Port Forwarding Rule Add/Edit Use this screen to add or edit a port forwarding rule. Click the Add new rule button or a rules edit icon in the Port Forwarding screen to display the screen as shown next. 150 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 72 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding: Add/Edit Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 53 Network Setting > NAT > Port Forwarding: Edit LABEL Active Service Name External Start Port DESCRIPTION Click this check box to enable the rule. Enter a name to identify this port-forwarding rule. Enter a port number in this field. To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the End Port field. To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in the End Port field. External End Port Enter a port number in this field. To forward only one port, enter the port number in the Start Port field above and then enter it again in this field. To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the Start Port field above. Enter the IP address of the server in your local network. Select the protocol of the service, TCP, UDP or ALL (TCP+UDP). Enter the first port number here to which you want the device to translate the incoming port. For a range of ports, you only need to enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated, the device automatically calculates the last port of the translated port range. Enter the last port number here to which you want the device to translate the incoming port. For a range of ports, you only need to enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated, the device automatically calculates the last port of the translated port range. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Server IP Address Trigger Protocol Open Start Port Open End Port Back Apply Cancel AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 151 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) 11.4 The DMZ Screen If you need to allow packets from a specific WAN connection to your local network, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default server receives packets from the specified WAN connection and the ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding Setup screen. Figure 73 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 54 Network Setting > NAT > DMZ LABEL WAN Interface DESCRIPTION Select a WAN PVC connection (PVC0~PVC7) from which you want to forward the traffic to the specified default server. Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT > Port Forwarding screen. Default Server Address Note: If you do not assign a Default Server Address, the AMG1312-T Series discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen. Apply Cancel Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 11.5 The ALG Screen Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway (ALG). A SIP ALG allows SIP calls to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream. When the AMG1312-T Series registers with the SIP register server, the SIP ALG translates the AMG1312-T Seriess private IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address. You do not need to use STUN or an outbound proxy if your AMG1312-T Series is behind a SIP ALG. 152 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) Use this screen to enable and disable the SIP (VoIP) ALG in the AMG1312-T Series. To access this screen, click Network Settings > NAT > ALG. Figure 74 Network Setting > NAT > ALG The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 55 Network Setting > NAT > ALG LABEL ALG DESCRIPTION Enable the SIP ALG to make sure SIP (VoIP) works correctly with port-forwarding and address-mapping rules. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Cancel 11.6 NAT Technical Reference This chapter contains more information regarding NAT. 11.6.1 NAT Definitions Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the AMG1312-T Series, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts. Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side. Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table summarizes this information. Table 56 NAT Definitions ITEM Inside Outside Local Global DESCRIPTION This refers to the host on the LAN. This refers to the host on the WAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN. This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 153 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host. 11.6.2 What NAT Does In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber

(the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back, NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note that the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed. The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP. In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Many-

to-One and Many-to-Many Overload mapping see Table 57 on page 156), NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection. With no servers defined, your AMG1312-T Series filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT). 11.6.3 How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many-to-One and Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The AMG1312-T Series keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this. Figure 75 How NAT Works LAN 192.168.1.13 192.168.1.12 SA 192.168.1.10 WAN NAT Table Inside Local IP Address 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.12 192.168.1.13 Inside Global IP Address IGA 1 IGA 2 IGA 3 IGA 4 SA IGA1 Inside Local Address (ILA) Inside Global Address (IGA) 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.10 11.6.4 NAT Application The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs (logical LANs using IP alias) behind the AMG1312-T Series can communicate with three distinct WAN networks. 154 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 76 NAT Application With IP Alias Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) 11.6.5 NAT Mapping Types NAT supports five types of IP/port mapping. They are:

One to One: In One-to-One mode, the AMG1312-T Series maps one local IP address to one global IP address. Many to One: In Many-to-One mode, the AMG1312-T Series maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address. This is equivalent to SUA (for instance, PAT, port address translation), ZyXELs Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported (the SUA Only option in todays routers). Many to Many Overload: In Many-to-Many Overload mode, the AMG1312-T Series maps the multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses. Many-to-Many No Overload: In Many-to-Many No Overload mode, the AMG1312-T Series maps each local IP address to a unique global IP address. Server: This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world. Port numbers do NOT change for One-to-One and Many-to-Many No Overload NAT mapping types. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 155 Chapter 11 Network Address Translation (NAT) The following table summarizes these types. Table 57 NAT Mapping Types TYPE One-to-One Many-to-One (SUA/PAT) Many-to-Many Overload Many-to-Many No Overload Server IP MAPPING ILA1 IGA1 ILA1 IGA1 ILA2 IGA1 ILA1 IGA1 ILA2 IGA2 ILA3 IGA1 ILA4 IGA2 ILA1 IGA1 ILA2 IGA2 ILA3 IGA3 Server 1 IP IGA1 Server 2 IP IGA1 Server 3 IP IGA1 156 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide CHAPTER 12 Port Binding 12.1 Overview This chapter describes how to configure the port binding settings. Port binding allows you to aggregate port connections into logical groups. You may bind WAN PVCs to Ethernet ports and WLANs to specify how traffic is forwarded. Different ATM QoS settings can be specified for each WAN PVC to meet bandwidth requirements for the type of traffic to be transferred. For example, three port binding groups could be created on the device (R1) for three different WAN PVC connections. The first PVC (PVC0) is for non time-sensitive data traffic. The second and third PVCs (PVC1 and PVC2) are for time sensitive Media-On-Demand (MOD) video traffic and VoIP traffic, respectively. Figure 77 Port Binding Groups Data VoIP MOD PVC0 R1 PVC1 PVC2 R1 R1 S1 S2 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 157 Chapter 12 Port Binding If a WAN PVC is bound to an ethernet port, traffic from the ethernet port will only be forwarded through the specified WAN PVC and vice versa. If a port is not in a port binding group, traffic to and from the port will be forwarded according to the routing table. See the tutorial section (Section on page 34) for more details on configuring port binding for multiple WAN connections. 12.1.1 What You Can Do in the Port Binding Screens Use the General screen (Section 12.3 on page 158) to activate port binding. Use the Port Binding screen (Section 12.3 on page 158) to set up port binding groups. Use the Port Binding Summary screen (Section 12.3.1 on page 159) to view configured port binding groups. 12.2 The Port Binding General Screen Use this screen to activate port binding and set up port binding groups. Click Network Setting >

Port Binding to display the following screen. Figure 78 Network Setting > Port Binding The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 58 Network Setting > Port Binding LABEL Activated Port Binding Activate or deactivate the port binding feature. Apply Add the selected port binding group configuration. DESCRIPTION 12.3 The Port Binding Screen Use this screen to set up port binding groups. Click Network Setting > Port Binding > Port Binding to display the following screen. 158 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 79 Network Setting > Port Binding > Port Binding Chapter 12 Port Binding The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 59 Network Setting > Port Binding > Port Binding LABEL Port Binding Active Group Index DESCRIPTION Activate or deactivate port binding for the port binding group. Select the index number for the port binding group. When a port is assigned to a port binding group, traffic will be forwarded to the other ports in the group, but not to ports in other groups. If a port is not included in any groups, traffic will be forwarded according to the routing table. Select the ATM VC (PVC) to include in the port binding group. Each ATM VC can only be bound to one group. Select the Ethernet (Eth) ports to include in the port binding group. Each Ethernet port can only be bound to one group. Select the WLAN (AP) connection to include in the port binding group. Additional APs can be enabled on the More AP screen (Section 7.3 on page 94). Click this to view a summary of configured port binding groups. Add the selected port binding group configuration. Delete the selected port binding group configuration. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. ATM VCs Ethernet Wireless LAN Group Summary Port Binding Summary Apply Delete Cancel 12.3.1 Port Binding Summary Screen Use this screen to view configured port binding groups. In the Port Binding screen, click the Port Binding Summary button in the Group Summary section to display the following screen. Figure 80 Network Setting > Port Binding > Port Binding Summary Example AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 159 Chapter 12 Port Binding The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 60 Network Setting > Port Binding > Port Binding Summary LABEL Group ID Group port DESCRIPTION This field displays the group index number. This field displays the ports included in the group. 160 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide

CHAPTER 13 Dynamic DNS Setup 13.1 Overview Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-SeeMe, etc.). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address. First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name. The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key. 13.1.1 What You Can Do in the DDNS Screen Use the Dynamic DNS screen (Section 13.2 on page 161) to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the AMG1312-T Series. 13.1.2 What You Need To Know About DDNS DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname. If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS. 13.2 The Dynamic DNS Screen Use this screen to change your AMG1312-T Seriess DDNS. Click Network Setting > Dynamic DNS. The screen appears as shown. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 161 Chapter 13 Dynamic DNS Setup Figure 81 Network Setting > Dynamic DNS The following table describes the fields in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 61 Network Setting > Dynamic DNS LABEL Dynamic DNS Setup Active Dynamic DNS Service Provider Host Name Select this check box to use dynamic DNS. This is the website of your Dynamic DNS service provider. Type the domain name assigned to your AMG1312-T Series by your Dynamic DNS provider. Username Password Enable Wildcard Option Apply Cancel You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma (","). Type your user name. Type the password assigned to you. Select the check box to enable DynDNS Wildcard. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 162 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide CHAPTER 14 Filters 14.1 Overview This chapter introduces three types of filters supported by the AMG1312-T Series. You can configure rules to restrict traffic by IP addresses, MAC addresses, IPv6 addresses and/or URLs. 14.1.1 What You Can Do in the Filter Screens Use the IP/MAC Filter screen (Section 14.2 on page 163) to create IP and MAC filter rules. Use the IPv6/MAC Filter screen (Section 14.3 on page 166) to create IPv6 and MAC filter rules. 14.1.2 What You Need to Know About Filtering URL The URL (Uniform Resource Locator) identifies and helps locates resources on a network. On the Internet the URL is the web address that you type in the address bar of your Internet browser, for example http://www.zyxel.com. URL and IP Filter Structure The URL, IP and IPv6 filters have individual rule indexes. The AMG1312-T Series allows you to configure each type of filter with its own respective set of rules. 14.2 The IP/MAC Filter Screen Use this screen to create and apply IP and MAC filters. Click Security > Filter > IP/MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 163 Chapter 14 Filters Figure 82 Security > Filter > IP/MAC Filter The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 62 Security > Filter > IP/MAC Filter LABEL DESCRIPTION Rule Type Rule Type selection Select White List to specify traffic to allow and Black List to specify traffic to disallow. IP / MAC Filter Rule Editing IP / MAC Filter Rule Index Active Interface Direction Rule Type Source IP Address Subnet Mask Port Number Destination IP Address Select the index number of the filter rule. Use this field to enable or disable the filter rule. Select the PVC to which to apply the filter. Apply the filter to Incoming or Outgoing traffic direction. Select IP or MAC type to configure the rule. Use the IP Filter to block or allow traffic by IP addresses. Use the MAC Filter to block or allow traffic by MAC address. Enter the source IP address of the packets you wish to filter. This field is ignored if it is 0.0.0.0. Enter the IP subnet mask for the source IP address Enter the source port of the packets that you wish to filter. The range of this field is 0 to 65535. This field is ignored if it is 0. Enter the destination IP address of the packets you wish to filter. This field is ignored if it is 0.0.0.0. 164 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 14 Filters Table 62 Security > Filter > IP/MAC Filter (continued) LABEL Subnet Mask Port Number DESCRIPTION Enter the IP subnet mask for the destination IP address. Enter the destination port of the packets that you wish to filter. The range of this field is 0 to 65535. This field is ignored if it is 0. Select ICMP, TCP or UDP for the upper layer protocol. Protocol IP / MAC Filter Listing IP / MAC Filter Rule Index

Active Interface Direction Src IP/Mask Dest IP/Mask Mac Address Src Port Dest Port Protocol Apply Delete Cancel Select the index number of the filter set from the drop-down list box. This is the index number of the rule in a filter set. This field shows whether the rule is activated. This is the interface that the filter set applies to. The filter set applies to this traffic direction. This is the source IP address and subnet mask when you select IP as the rule type. This is the destination IP address and subnet mask. This is the MAC address of the packets being filtered. This is the source port number. This is the destination port number. This is the upper layer protocol. Click this to apply your changes. Click this to remove the filter rule. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 165 Chapter 14 Filters 14.3 IPv6/MAC Filter Use this screen to create and apply IPv6 filters. Click Security > Filter > IPv6/MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown. Figure 83 Security > Filter > IPv6/MAC Filter The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 63 Security > Filter > IPv6/MAC Filter LABEL Rule Type Rule Type selection DESCRIPTION Select White List to specify traffic to allow and Black List to specify traffic to block. IPv6 / MAC Filter Rule Editing IPv6 / MAC Filter Rule Index Active Interface Direction Rule Type Select the index number of the filter rule. Use this field to enable or disable the filter rule. Select the PVC to which to apply the filter. Apply the filter to Incoming or Outgoing traffic direction. Select IP or MAC type to configure the rule. Use the IP Filter to block or allow traffic by IPv6 addresses. Source IP Address Source Prefix Length Destination IPv6 Address Use the MAC Filter to block or allow traffic by MAC address. Enter the source IPv6 address of the packets you wish to filter. This field is ignored if it is ::. Enter the prefix length for the source IPv6 address Enter the destination IPv6 address of the packets you wish to filter. This field is ignored if it is ::. 166 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 14 Filters Table 63 Security > Filter > IPv6/MAC Filter (continued) LABEL Destination Prefix Length ICMPv6 Type DESCRIPTION Enter the prefix length for the destination IPv6 address. Select the ICMPv6 message type to filter. The following message types can be selected:

1 / Destination Unreachable: 0 - no route to destination; 1 -

communication with destination administratively prohibited; 3 - address unreachable; 4 - port unreachable 2 / Packet Too Big 3 / Time Exceeded: 0 - hop limit exceeded in transit; 1 - fragment reassembly time exceeded 4 / Parameter Problem: 0 - erroneous header field encountered; 1 -

unrecognized Next Header type encountered; 2 - unrecognized IPv6 option encountered 128 / Echo Request 129 / Echo Response 130 / Listener Query - Multicast listener query 131 / Listener Report - Multicast listener report 132 / Listener Done - Multicast listener done 143 / Listener Report v2 - Multicast listener report v2 133 / Router Solicitation 134 / Router Advertisement 135 / Neighbor Solicitation 136 / Neighbor Advertisement Protocol IPv6 / MAC Filter Listing IPv6 / MAC Filter Rule Index

Active Interface Direction ICMPv6 Type Src IP/PrefixLength Dest IP/PrefixLength Mac Address Protocol Apply Delete Cancel 137 / Redirect - Redirect message This is the (upper layer) protocol that defines the service to which this rule applies. By default it is ICMPv6. Select the index number of the filter set from the drop-down list box. This is the index number of the rule in a filter set. This field shows whether the rule is activated. This is the interface that the rule applies to. The filter set applies to this traffic direction. The ICMPv6 message type to filter. This displays the source IPv6 address and prefix length. This displays the destination IPv6 address and prefix length. This is the MAC address of the packets being filtered. This is the (upper layer) protocol that defines the service to which this rule applies. By default it is ICMPv6. Click this to apply your changes. Click this to remove the filter rule. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 167 CHAPTER 15 Firewall 15.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to enable the AMG1312-T Series firewall. Use the firewall to protect your AMG1312-T Series and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to it. The firewall:

allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks. blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN. blocks SYN and port scanner attacks. By default, the AMG1312-T Series blocks DDOS, LAND and Ping of Death attacks whether the firewall is enabled or disabled. The following figure illustrates the firewall action. User A can initiate an IM (Instant Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2). However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked (3 and 4). Figure 84 Default Firewall Action LAN WAN A 1 2 3 4 15.1.1 What You Can Do in the Firewall Screens Use the General screen (Section 15.2 on page 170) to select the firewall protection level on the AMG1312-T Series. Use the Default Action screen (Section 15.3 on page 171) to set the default action that the firewall takes on packets that do not match any of the firewall rules. Use the Rules screen (Section 15.4 on page 173) to view the configured firewall rules and add, edit or remove a firewall rule. Use the Dos screen (Section 15.5 on page 179) to set the thresholds that the AMG1312-T Series uses to determine when to start dropping sessions that do not become fully established (half-

open sessions). AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 168 15.1.2 What You Need to Know About Firewall SYN Attack Chapter 15 Firewall A SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets. Each packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response. While the targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-ACK, it queues up all outstanding SYN-ACK responses on a backlog queue. SYN-

ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer terminates the three-way handshake. Once the queue is full, the system will ignore all incoming SYN requests, making the system unavailable for legitimate users. DoS Denials of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the Internet. Their goal is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources. The AMG1312-T Series is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart all known DoS attacks. DDoS A Distributed DoS (DDoS) attack is one in which multiple compromised systems attack a single target, thereby causing denial of service for users of the targeted system. LAND Attack In a Local Area Network Denial (LAND) attack, hackers flood SYN packets into the network with a spoofed source IP address of the target system. This makes it appear as if the host computer sent the packets to itself, making the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to itself. Ping of Death Ping of Death uses a "ping" utility to create and send an IP packet that exceeds the maximum 65,536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification. This may cause systems to crash, hang or reboot. SPI Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI) tracks each connection crossing the firewall and makes sure it is valid. Filtering decisions are based not only on rules but also context. For example, traffic from the WAN may only be allowed to cross the firewall in response to a request from the LAN. RFC 4890 SPEC Traffic RFC 4890 specifies the filtering policies for ICMPv6 messages. This is important for protecting against security threats including DoS, probing, redirection attacks and renumbering attacks that can be carried out through ICMPv6. Since ICMPv6 error messages are critical for establishing and maintaining communications, filtering policy focuses on ICMPv6 informational messages. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 169 Chapter 15 Firewall Anti-Probing If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your AMG1312-T Series, an ICMP response packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the AMG1312-T Series exists. The AMG1312-T Series supports anti-probing, which prevents the ICMP response packet from being sent. This keeps outsiders from discovering your AMG1312-T Series when unsupported ports are probed. ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) is a message control and error-reporting protocol between a host server and a gateway to the Internet. ICMP uses Internet Protocol (IP) datagrams, but the messages are processed by the TCP/IP software and directly apparent to the application user. DoS Thresholds For DoS attacks, the AMG1312-T Series uses thresholds to determine when to drop sessions that do not become fully established. These thresholds apply globally to all sessions. You can use the default threshold values, or you can change them to values more suitable to your security requirements. 15.2 The Firewall General Screen Use this screen to select the firewall protection level on the AMG1312-T Series. Click Security >

Firewall > General to display the following screen. Figure 85 Security > Firewall > General 170 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 15 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 64 Security > Firewall > General LABEL High DESCRIPTION This setting blocks all traffic to and from the Internet. Only local network traffic and LAN to WAN service (Telnet, FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, DNS, POP3, SMTP) is permitted. Medium This is the recommended setting. It allows traffic to the Internet but blocks anyone from the Internet from accessing any services on your local network. This setting allows traffic to the Internet and also allows someone from the Internet to access services on your local network. This would be used with Port Forwarding, Default Server. Low Custom This setting allows the customer to create and edit individual firewall rules. Firewall rules can be created in the Default Action screen (Section 15.3 on page 171) and Rules screen (Section 15.4 on page 173). This setting is not recommended. It disables firewall protection for your network and could potentially expose your network to significant security risks. This option should only be used for troubleshooting or if you intend using another firewall in conjunction with your ZyXEL router. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Off Apply Cancel 15.3 The Default Action Screen Use this screen to set the default action that the firewall takes on packets that do not match any of the firewall rules. Click Security > Firewall > Default Action to display the following screen. Figure 86 Security > Firewall > Default Action AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 171 Chapter 15 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 65 Security > Firewall > Default Action LABEL Packet Direction DESCRIPTION This is the direction of travel of packets (LAN to Router, LAN to WAN, WAN to Router, WAN to LAN). Default Action Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply. For example, LAN to Router means packets traveling from a computer/subnet on the LAN to the AMG1312-T Series itself. Use the drop-down list boxes to select the default action that the firewall is to take on packets that are traveling in the selected direction and do not match any of the firewall rules. Select Drop to silently discard the packets without sending a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender. Select Reject to deny the packets and send a TCP reset packet (for a TCP packet) or an ICMP destination-unreachable message (for a UDP packet) to the sender. Apply Cancel Select Permit to allow the passage of the packets. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 172 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 15 Firewall 15.4 The Rules Screen Click Security > Firewall > Rules to display the following screen. This screen displays a list of the configured firewall rules. Note the order in which the rules are listed. Note: The firewall configuration screen shown in this section is specific to the following devices: P-The ordering of your rules is very important as rules are applied in turn. Figure 87 Security > Firewall > Rules The following table describes the labels in this screen. Packet Direction Create a new rule after rule number Table 66 Security > Firewall > Rules DESCRIPTION LABEL This read-only bar shows how much of the AMG1312-T Series's memory for Firewall Rules Storage recording firewall rules it is currently using. When you are using 80% or less of the Space in Use storage space, the bar is green. When the amount of space used is over 80%, the bar is red. Use the drop-down list box to select a direction of travel of packets for which you want to configure firewall rules. Select an index number and click Add to add a new firewall rule after the selected index number. For example, if you select 6, your new rule becomes number 7 and the previous rule 7 (if there is one) becomes rule 8. The following read-only fields summarize the rules you have created that apply to traffic traveling in the selected packet direction. The firewall rules that you configure

(summarized below) take priority over the general firewall action settings in the General screen. This is your firewall rule number. The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in turn. This field displays whether a firewall is turned on or not. Select the check box to enable the rule. Clear the check box to disable the rule. This column displays the source addresses or ranges of addresses to which this firewall rule applies. Please note that a blank source or destination address is equivalent to Any. Source IP Address Active

Destination IP Address This column displays the destination addresses or ranges of addresses to which this Service Action Source Interface firewall rule applies. Please note that a blank source or destination address is equivalent to Any. This column displays the services to which this firewall rule applies. See Appendix F on page 286 for more information. This field displays whether the firewall silently discards packets (Drop), discards packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender (Reject) or allows the passage of packets (Permit). This column displays the source interface to which this firewall rule applies. This is the interface through which the traffic entered the AMG1312-T Series. Please note that a blank source interface is equivalent to Any. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 173 Chapter 15 Firewall Table 66 Security > Firewall > Rules (continued) LABEL Destination Interface DESCRIPTION This column displays the destination interface to which this firewall rule applies. This is the interface through which the traffic is destined to leave the AMG1312-T Series. Please note that a blank source interface is equivalent to Any. Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule. Click the Remove icon to delete an existing firewall rule. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the firewall rule. Note that subsequent firewall rules move up by one when you take this action. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Modify Apply Cancel 15.4.1 The Rules Add Screen Use this screen to configure firewall rules. In the Rules screen, select an index number and click Add or click a rules Edit icon to display this screen and refer to the following table for information on the labels. 174 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 88 Security > Firewall > Rules > Add Chapter 15 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 67 Security > Firewall > Rules > Add LABEL Active Action for Matched Packets DESCRIPTION Select this option to enable this firewall rule. Use the drop-down list box to select whether to discard (Drop), deny and send an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender of (Reject) or allow the passage of (Permit) packets that match this rule. Select the IP version, IPv4 or IPv6, to apply this firewall rule to. Set a maximum number of packets per second, minute, or hour to limit the throughput of traffic that matches this rule. Set the maximum number of packets that can be sent at the peak rate. This field determines if a log for packets that match the rule is created or not. IP Version Type Rate Limit Maximum Burst Number Log Rules/Destination Address AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 175 Chapter 15 Firewall Table 67 Security > Firewall > Rules > Add (continued) LABEL Address Type DESCRIPTION Do you want your rule to apply to packets with a particular (single) IP, a range of IP addresses (for instance, 192.168.1.10 to 192.169.1.50), a subnet or any IP address?

Select an option from the drop-down list box that includes: Single Address, Range Address, Subnet Address and Any Address. Enter the single IP address or the starting IP address in a range here. Enter the ending IP address in a range here. Enter the subnet mask here, if applicable. Specify a source MAC address of traffic to which to apply this firewall rule applies. Please note that a blank source MAC address is equivalent to any. Specify a source interface to which this firewall rule applies. This is the interface through which the traffic entered the AMG1312-T Series. Please note that a blank source interface is equivalent to any. Specify a destination interface to which this firewall rule applies. This is the interface through which the traffic is destined to leave the AMG1312-T Series. Please note that a blank source interface is equivalent to any. Please see Appendix F on page 286 for more information on services available. Select a service from the Available Services box. Click the Edit Customized Service button to bring up the screen that you use to configure a new custom service that is not in the predefined list of services. Specify any TCP flag bits the firewall rule is to check for. Select the days and time during which to apply the rule. Select Everyday and All Day to always apply the rule. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Start IP Address End IP Address Subnet Mask Source Mac Address Source Interface Destination Interface Services Available Services Edit Customized Service TCP Flag Schedule Apply Cancel 15.4.2 Customized Services Configure customized services and port numbers not predefined by the AMG1312-T Series. For a comprehensive list of port numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet Assigned Number Authority) website. See Appendix F on page 286 for some examples. Click the Edit Customized Services button while editing a firewall rule to configure a custom service port. This displays the following screen. 176 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 89 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services Chapter 15 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 68 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services LABEL

Name Protocol Port Type Start Port DESCRIPTION This is the number of your customized port. This is the name of your customized service. This shows the IP protocol (TCP or UDP) that defines your customized service. This is the port number or range that defines your customized service. This is a single port number or the starting port number of a range that defines your customized service. This is a single port number or the ending port number of a range that defines your customized service. Click this to edit a customized service. Click this to configure a customized service. Click this to return to the Firewall Edit Rule screen. End Port Modify Add Back 15.4.3 Customized Service Add/Edit Use this screen to add a customized rule or edit an existing rule. Click Add or the Edit icon next to a rule number in the Firewall Customized Services screen to display the following screen. Figure 90 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services: Add/Edit AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 177 Chapter 15 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen. DESCRIPTION Table 69 Security > Firewall > Rules: Edit: Edit Customized Services: Add/Edit LABEL Config Service Name Service Type Type a unique name for your custom port. Choose the IP port (TCP or UDP) that defines your customized port from the drop down list box. Port Configuration Type Port Number Back Apply Cancel Delete Click Single to specify one port only or Port Range to specify a span of ports that define your customized service. Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized service. Click this to return to the previous screen without saving. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Click this to delete the current rule. 178 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 15.5 The DoS Screen Use this screen to enable DoS protection. Click Security > Firewall > Dos to display the following screen. Figure 91 Security > Firewall > Dos Chapter 15 Firewall The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 70 Security > Firewall > Dos LABEL Denial of Services Enable this to protect against DoS attacks. The AMG1312-T Series will drop sessions that DESCRIPTION Apply Cancel Advanced surpass maximum thresholds. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Click this to go to a screen to specify maximum thresholds at which the AMG1312-T Series will start dropping sessions. 15.5.1 The DoS Advanced Screen For DoS attacks, the AMG1312-T Series uses thresholds to determine when to start dropping sessions that do not become fully established (half-open sessions). These thresholds apply globally to all sessions. For TCP, half-open means that the session has not reached the established state-the TCP three-way handshake has not yet been completed. Under normal circumstances, the application that initiates a session sends a SYN (synchronize) packet to the receiving server. The receiver sends back an ACK

(acknowledgment) packet and its own SYN, and then the initiator responds with an ACK

(acknowledgment). After this handshake, a connection is established. Figure 92 Three-Way Handshake For UDP, half-open means that the firewall has detected no return traffic. An unusually high number

(or arrival rate) of half-open sessions could indicate a DOS attack. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 179 Chapter 15 Firewall 15.5.1.1 Threshold Values If everything is working properly, you probably do not need to change the threshold settings as the default threshold values should work for most small offices. Tune these parameters when you believe the AMG1312-T Series has been receiving DoS attacks that are not recorded in the logs or the logs show that the AMG1312-T Series is classifying normal traffic as DoS attacks. Factors influencing choices for threshold values are:

1 2 3 The maximum number of opened sessions. The minimum capacity of server backlog in your LAN network. The CPU power of servers in your LAN network. 4 Network bandwidth. 5 Type of traffic for certain servers. Reduce the threshold values if your network is slower than average for any of these factors

(especially if you have servers that are slow or handle many tasks and are often busy). If you often use P2P applications such as file sharing with eMule or eDonkey, its recommended that you increase the threshold values since lots of sessions will be established during a small period of time and the AMG1312-T Series may classify them as DoS attacks. 15.5.2 Configuring Firewall Thresholds Click Security > Firewall > DoS > Advanced to display the following screen. Figure 93 Security > Firewall > DoS > Advanced 180 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen. Chapter 15 Firewall Table 71 Security > Firewall > DoS > Advanced LABEL TCP SYN-Request Count DESCRIPTION This is the rate of new TCP half-open sessions per second that causes the firewall to start deleting half-open sessions. When the rate of new connection attempts rises above this number, the AMG1312-T Series deletes half-open sessions as required to accommodate new connection attempts. This is the rate of new UDP half-open sessions per second that causes the firewall to start deleting half-open sessions. When the rate of new connection attempts rises above this number, the AMG1312-T Series deletes half-open sessions as required to accommodate new connection attempts. This is the rate of new ICMP Echo-Request half-open sessions per second that causes the firewall to start deleting half-open sessions. When the rate of new connection attempts rises above this number, the AMG1312-T Series deletes half-open sessions as required to accommodate new connection attempts. Click this button to return to the previous screen. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. UDP Packet Count ICMP Echo-Request Count Back Apply Cancel 15.6 Firewall Technical Reference This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter. 15.6.1 Firewall Rules Overview Your customized rules take precedence and override the AMG1312-T Seriess default settings. The AMG1312-T Series checks the source IP address, destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic against the firewall rules (in the order you list them). When the traffic matches a rule, the AMG1312-T Series takes the action specified in the rule. Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply:

LAN to Router LAN to WAN WAN to LAN WAN to Router Note: The LAN includes both the LAN port and the WLAN. By default, the AMG1312-T Seriess stateful packet inspection allows packets traveling in the following directions:

LAN to Router These rules specify which computers on the LAN can manage the AMG1312-T Series (remote management). Note: You can also configure the remote management settings to allow only a specific computer to manage the AMG1312-T Series. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 181 Chapter 15 Firewall LAN to WAN These rules specify which computers on the LAN can access which computers or services on the WAN. By default, the AMG1312-T Seriess stateful packet inspection drops packets traveling in the following directions:

WAN to LAN These rules specify which computers on the WAN can access which computers or services on the LAN. Note: You also need to configure NAT port forwarding (or full featured NAT address mapping rules) to allow computers on the WAN to access devices on the LAN. WAN to Router By default the AMG1312-T Series stops computers on the WAN from managing the AMG1312-T Series. You could configure one of these rules to allow a WAN computer to manage the AMG1312-T Series. Note: You also need to configure the remote management settings to allow a WAN computer to manage the AMG1312-T Series. You may define additional rules and sets or modify existing ones but please exercise extreme caution in doing so. For example, you may create rules to:

Block certain types of traffic, such as IRC (Internet Relay Chat), from the LAN to the Internet. Allow certain types of traffic, such as Lotus Notes database synchronization, from specific hosts on the Internet to specific hosts on the LAN. Allow everyone except your competitors to access a web server. Restrict use of certain protocols, such as Telnet, to authorized users on the LAN. These custom rules work by comparing the source IP address, destination IP address and IP protocol type of network traffic to rules set by the administrator. Your customized rules take precedence and override the AMG1312-T Seriess default rules. 15.6.2 Guidelines For Enhancing Security With Your Firewall 6 7 8 Change the default password via web configurator. Think about access control before you connect to the network in any way. Limit who can access your router. 9 Don't enable any local service (such as telnet or FTP) that you don't use. Any enabled service could present a potential security risk. A determined hacker might be able to find creative ways to misuse the enabled services to access the firewall or the network. 10 For local services that are enabled, protect against misuse. Protect by configuring the services to communicate only with specific peers, and protect by configuring rules to block packets for the services at specific interfaces. 182 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 15 Firewall 11 Protect against IP spoofing by making sure the firewall is active. 12 Keep the firewall in a secured (locked) room. 15.6.3 Security Considerations Note: Incorrectly configuring the firewall may block valid access or introduce security risks to the AMG1312-T Series and your protected network. Use caution when creating or deleting firewall rules and test your rules after you configure them. Consider these security ramifications before creating a rule:

1 Does this rule stop LAN users from accessing critical resources on the Internet? For example, if IRC is blocked, are there users that require this service?

2 Is it possible to modify the rule to be more specific? For example, if IRC is blocked for all users, will a rule that blocks just certain users be more effective?

3 Does a rule that allows Internet users access to resources on the LAN create a security vulnerability? For example, if FTP ports (TCP 20, 21) are allowed from the Internet to the LAN, Internet users may be able to connect to computers with running FTP servers. 4 Does this rule conflict with any existing rules?

Once these questions have been answered, adding rules is simply a matter of entering the information into the correct fields in the web configurator screens. 15.6.4 Triangle Route When the firewall is on, your AMG1312-T Series acts as a secure gateway between your LAN and the Internet. In an ideal network topology, all incoming and outgoing network traffic passes through the AMG1312-T Series to protect your LAN against attacks. Figure 94 Ideal Firewall Setup LAN 1 2 WAN 15.6.4.1 The Triangle Route Problem A traffic route is a path for sending or receiving data packets between two Ethernet devices. You may have more than one connection to the Internet (through one or more ISPs). If an alternate gateway is on the LAN (and its IP address is in the same subnet as the AMG1312-T Seriess LAN IP address), the triangle route (also called asymmetrical route) problem may occur. The steps below describe the triangle route problem. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 183 Chapter 15 Firewall 1 2 3 A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending out a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN. The AMG1312-T Series reroutes the SYN packet through Gateway A on the LAN to the WAN. The reply from the WAN goes directly to the computer on the LAN without going through the AMG1312-T Series. As a result, the AMG1312-T Series resets the connection, as the connection has not been acknowledged. Figure 95 Triangle Route Problem LAN 1 3 2 WAN ISP 1 ISP 2 15.6.4.2 Solving the Triangle Route Problem A If you have the AMG1312-T Series allow triangle route sessions, traffic from the WAN can go directly to a LAN computer without passing through the AMG1312-T Series and its firewall protection. Another solution is to use IP alias. IP alias allows you to partition your network into logical sections over the same Ethernet interface. Your AMG1312-T Series supports up to three logical LAN interfaces with the AMG1312-T Series being the gateway for each logical network. Its like having multiple LAN networks that actually use the same physical cables and ports. By putting your LAN and Gateway A in different subnets, all returning network traffic must pass through the AMG1312-T Series to your LAN. The following steps describe such a scenario. A computer on the LAN initiates a connection by sending a SYN packet to a receiving server on the WAN. The AMG1312-T Series reroutes the packet to Gateway A, which is in Subnet 2. The reply from the WAN goes to the AMG1312-T Series. The AMG1312-T Series then sends it to the computer on the LAN in Subnet 1. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 1 2 3 4 184 Chapter 15 Firewall Figure 96 IP Alias LAN 1 4 Subnet 1 WAN 2 3 A Subnet 2 ISP 1 ISP 2 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 185 CHAPTER 16 Parental Control 16.1 Overview Parental control allows you to block web sites with the specific URL. You can also define time periods and days during which the AMG1312-T Series performs parental control on a specific user. 16.2 The Parental Control Screen Use this screen to enable parental control, view the parental control rules and schedules. Click Security > Parental Control to open the following screen. Figure 97 Security > Parental Control The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 72 Security > Parental Control LABEL Parental Control Add new PCP

Status DESCRIPTION Use this field to activate or deactivate parental control. Click this to create a new parental control rule. This is the index number of the rule. This indicates whether the rule is active or not. PCP Name Home Network User Internet Access Schedule Network Service A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active. This shows the name of the rule. This shows the MAC address of the LAN users computer to which this rule applies. This shows the day(s) and time on which parental control is enabled. This shows whether the network service is configured. If not, None will be shown. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 186 Chapter 16 Parental Control Table 72 Security > Parental Control (continued) LABEL Website Blocked Modify DESCRIPTION This shows whether the website block is configured. If not, None will be shown. Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule. Apply Cancel Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. 16.2.1 Add/Edit Parental Control Rule Click Add new PCP in the Parental Control screen to add a new rule or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to edit it. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule and/or URL filtering settings to block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites. Figure 98 Add/Edit Parental Control Rule The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 73 Parental Control: Add/Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION General Active Select the checkbox to activate this parental control rule. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 187 Chapter 16 Parental Control Table 73 Parental Control: Add/Edit (continued) LABEL Parental Control Profile Name Home Network User DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name for the rule. Select the LAN user that you want to apply this rule to from the drop-down list box. If you select Custom, enter the LAN users MAC address. If you select All, the rule applies to all LAN users. Internet Access Schedule Day Select check boxes for the days that you want the AMG1312-T Series to perform parental control. Time of Day to Apply Enter the starting and ending time that the LAN user is allowed access. Network Service Network Service Setting If you select Block, the AMG1312-T Series prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with the URLs listed below. Add new service Active Service Name Protocol Port Modify Blocked Site/URL Apply Cancel If you select Access, the AMG1312-T Series blocks access to all URLs except ones listed below. Click this to show a screen in which you can add a new service rule. You can configure the Service Name, Protocol, and Name of the new rule. This shows whether a configured service is activated or not. This shows the name of the rule. This shows the protocol of the rule. This shows the port of the rule. Click the Edit icon to go to the screen where you can edit the rule. Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Enter the URL of web sites or URL keywords to which the AMG1312-T Series blocks access. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving. 188 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide CHAPTER 17 Certificate 17.1 Overview The AMG1312-T Series can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owners identity and public key. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication. 17.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Local Certificates screen to view and import the AMG1312-T Seriess CA-signed certificates (Section 17.3 on page 189). The Trusted CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to the AMG1312-T Series

(Section 17.4 on page 191). 17.2 What You Need to Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter. Certification Authority A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. There are commercial certification authorities like CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities. The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can then use the certification authority's public key to verify the certificates. You can use the AMG1312-T Series to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send the certification requests to a certification authority. Certificate File Format The certification authority certificate that you want to import has to be in one of these file formats:

PEM (Base-64) encoded X.509: This Privacy Enhanced Mail format uses 64 ASCII characters to convert a binary X.509 certificate into a printable form. 17.3 Local Certificates Use this screen to view the AMG1312-T Seriess summary list of certificates and certification requests. You can import the following certificates to your AMG1312-T Series:

AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 189 Chapter 17 Certificate Web Server - This certificate secures HTTP connections. SSH - This certificate secures remote connections. Click Security > Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen. Figure 99 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 74 Security > Certificates > Local Certificates LABEL WebServer Current File DESCRIPTION Click Browse... to find the certificate file you want to upload. This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name. This field displays identifying information about the certificates owner, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department), O (Organization or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. This field displays identifying information about the certificates issuing certification authority, such as a common name, organizational unit or department, organization or company and country. This field displays the date that the certificate becomes applicable. The text displays in red and includes a Not Yet Valid! message if the certificate has not yet become applicable. This field displays the date that the certificate expires. The text displays in red and includes an Expiring! or Expired! message if the certificate is about to expire or has already expired. Click this button and then Save in the File Download screen. The Save As screen opens, browse to the location that you want to use and click Save. Type in the location of the SSH certificate file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it. This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name. This field applies to the SSH certificate. This shows the file format of the current certificate. Click this to replace the certificate(s) and save your changes back to the AMG1312-T Series. Click this to clear your settings. Subject Issuer Valid From Valid To Cert SSH Current File Key Type Replace Reset 190 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 17 Certificate 17.4 The Trusted CA Screen Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the AMG1312-T Series to accept as trusted. The AMG1312-T Series accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities. Click Security > Certificates > Trusted CA to open the Trusted CA screen. Figure 100 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 75 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA LABEL Import Certificate DESCRIPTION Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust to the AMG1312-T Series. This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), OU (Organizational Unit or department), Organization (O), State

(ST) and Country (C). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information. This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. Click View to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate. Name Subject Type Action Click Remove to delete the certificate. 17.5 Trusted CA Import Click Import Certificate in the Trusted CA screen to open the Import Certificate screen. You can save a trusted certification authoritys certificate to the AMG1312-T Series. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 191 Chapter 17 Certificate Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificates filename before you can import the certificate. Figure 101 Trusted CA > Import The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 76 Security > Certificates > Trusted CA > Import LABEL Certificate File Path Browse Apply Back DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it. Click Browse to find the certificate file you want to upload. Click Apply to save the certificate on the AMG1312-T Series. Click Back to return to the previous screen. 17.6 View Certificate Use this screen to view in-depth information about the certification authoritys certificate, change the certificates name and set whether or not you want the AMG1312-T Series to check a certification authoritys list of revoked certificates before trusting a certificate issued by the certification authority. 192 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Click Security > Certificates > Trusted CA to open the Trusted CA screen. Click the View icon to open the View Certificate screen. Figure 102 Trusted CA: View Chapter 17 Certificate The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 77 Trusted CA: View LABEL Certificate Name Certificate Detail DESCRIPTION This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. If you want to change the name, type up to 31 characters to identify this key certificate. You may use any character (not including spaces). This read-only text box displays the certificate or certification request in Privacy Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses 64 ASCII characters to convert the binary certificate into a printable form. You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example). Click this to return to the previous screen. Back AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 193 CHAPTER 18 Logs 18.1 Overview The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and/or alerts to have the AMG1312-T Series log and then display the logs or have the AMG1312-T Series send them to an administrator (as e-mail) or to a syslog server. 18.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the Log screen to see the system logs for the categories that you select (Section 18.2 on page 195). 18.1.2 What You Need To Know The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter. Alerts and Logs An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors, attacks

(access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites. Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black. Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server. Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet format, content and system log related information of syslog messages. Each syslog message has a facility and severity level. The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details. The following table describes the syslog severity levels. Table 78 Syslog Severity Levels CODE 0 1 2 3 4 5 SEVERITY Emergency: The system is unusable. Alert: Action must be taken immediately. Critical: The system condition is critical. Error: There is an error condition on the system. Warning: There is a warning condition on the system. Notice: There is a normal but significant condition on the system. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 194 Table 78 Syslog Severity Levels (continued) CODE 6 7 SEVERITY Informational: The syslog contains an informational message. Debug: The message is intended for debug-level purposes. Chapter 18 Logs 18.2 The System Log Screen Click System Monitor > Log to open the System Log screen. Use the System Log screen to see the system logs for the categories that you select in the upper left drop-down list box. Figure 103 System Monitor > Log > System Log The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 79 System Monitor > Log > System Log LABEL Level DESCRIPTION Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the AMG1312-T Series searches through all logs of that severity or higher. Click this to renew the log screen. Click this to delete all the logs. Click this to download logs to a file on your computer. Click this to send logs to a specified e-mail address. This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry. This field displays the time the log was recorded. This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server. This field states the reason for the log. Refresh Clear Logs Export Email Log Now

Time Level Message AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 195 CHAPTER 19 Traffic Status 19.1 Overview Use the Traffic Status screens to look at network traffic status and statistics of the WAN, LAN interfaces and NAT. 19.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter Use the WAN screen to view the WAN traffic statistics (Section 19.2 on page 196). Use the LAN screen to view the LAN traffic statistics (Section 19.3 on page 197). Use the NAT screen to view the NAT status of the AMG1312-T Seriess client(s) (Section 19.4 on page 198). 19.2 The WAN Status Screen Click System Monitor > Traffic Status to open the WAN screen. You can view the WAN traffic statistics in this screen. Figure 104 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 80 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN LABEL Status DESCRIPTION This shows the number of bytes received and sent through the WAN interface of the AMG1312-T Series. Refresh Interval Select how often you want the AMG1312-T Series to update this screen from the drop-down list box. This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently connected. Connected Interface AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 196 Chapter 19 Traffic Status Table 80 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN (continued) LABEL Packets Sent DESCRIPTION Data Error Drop This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. Packets Received Data Error Drop This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. 19.3 The LAN Status Screen Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN to open the following screen. You can view the LAN traffic statistics in this screen. Figure 105 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 81 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN LABEL Refresh Interval(s) Set Interval DESCRIPTION Select how often you want the AMG1312-T Series to update this screen from the drop-down list box. Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Refresh Interval field. Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics. This shows the LAN or WLAN interface. This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface. This shows the LAN or WLAN interface. Stop Interface Bytes Sent Bytes Received Interface Sent (Packet) AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 197 Chapter 19 Traffic Status Table 81 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN (continued) LABEL Data Error Drop DESCRIPTION This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface. This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface. Received (Packet) Data Error Drop This indicates the number of received packets on this interface. This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface. This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface. 19.4 The NAT Screen Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT to open the following screen. You can view the NAT status of the AMG1312-T Seriess client(s) in this screen. Figure 106 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 82 System Monitor > Traffic Status > NAT LABEL Refresh Interval Select how often you want the AMG1312-T Series to update this screen from the drop-

DESCRIPTION down list box. Set Interval Stop Device Name IP Address MAC Address No. of Open Session Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Refresh Interval field. Click Stop to stop refreshing statistics. This shows the name of the client. This shows the IP address of the client. This shows the MAC address of the client. This shows the number of NAT sessions used by the client. 198 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide CHAPTER 20 User Account 20.1 Overview You can configure system password for different user accounts in the User Account screen. 20.2 The User Account Screen Use the User Account screen to configure system password. Click Maintenance > User Account to open the following screen. Figure 107 Maintenance > User Account The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 83 Maintenance > User Account LABEL User Name Old Password DESCRIPTION You can configure the password for the Power User and Admin accounts. Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field. Type your new system password (up to 30 characters). Note that as you type a password, the screen displays a (*) for each character you type. After you change the password, use the new password to access the AMG1312-T Series. Type the new password again for confirmation. Click Apply to save your changes. Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings. New Password Retype to Confirm Apply Cancel AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 199 CHAPTER 21 TR-069 Client 21.1 Overview The AMG1312-T Series supports TR-069 Amendment 1 (CPE WAN Management Protocol Release 2.0) and TR-069 Amendment 2 (CPE WAN Management Protocol v1.1, Release 3.0). TR-069 is a protocol that defines how your AMG1312-T Series (ZD) can be managed via a management server (MS) such as ZyXELs Vantage Access. Figure 108 LAN and WAN ZD MS An administrator can use a management server to remotely set up the AMG1312-T Series, modify settings, perform firmware upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the AMG1312-T Series. In order to use CWMP, you need to configure the following steps:

1 2 3 Activate CWMP Specify the URL, username and password. Activate periodic inform and specify an interval value. 21.2 The TR-069 Client Screen Use this screen to configure your AMG1312-T Series to be managed by a management server. Click Maintenance > TR-069 Client to display the following screen. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 200 Figure 109 Maintenance > TR-069 Client Chapter 21 TR-069 Client The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 84 Maintenance > TR-069 Client LINK CWMP ACS URL DESCRIPTION Select Enable to allow the AMG1312-T Series to be managed by a management server or select Disable to not allow the AMG1312-T Series to be managed by a management server. Type the IP address or domain name of the management server. If the AMG1312-T Series is behind a NAT router that assigns it a private IP address, you will have to configure a NAT port forwarding rule on the NAT router. ACS User Name The user name is used to authenticate the AMG1312-T Series when making a connection to the management server. This user name on the management server and the AMG1312-T Series must be the same. Type a user name of up to 255 printable characters found on an English-language keyboard. Spaces and characters such as @#$%^&*()_+ are allowed. The password is used to authenticate the AMG1312-T Series when making a connection to the management server. This password on the management server and the AMG1312-T Series must be the same. Type a password of up to 255 printable characters found on an English-language keyboard. Type the IP address or domain name of the AMG1312-T Series. The management server uses this path to verify the AMG1312-T Series. The default port for access to the AMG1312-T Series from the management server is port 7547. If you change it, make sure it does not conflict with another port on your network and it is recommended to use a port number above 1024 (not a commonly used port). The management server should use this port to connect to the AMG1312-T Series. You may need to alter your NAT port forwarding rules if they were already configured. The user name is used to authenticate the management server when connecting to the AMG1312-T Series. Type a user name of up to 255 printable characters found on an English-

language keyboard. Spaces and characters such as @#$%^&*()_+ are allowed. The password is used to authenticate the management server when connecting to the AMG1312-T Series. Type a password of up to 255 printable characters found on an English-

language keyboard. Spaces are not allowed. Select Enable to have the AMG1312-T Series periodically send information to the management server (recommended if CWMP is enabled) or select Disable to not have the AMG1312-T Series periodically send information to the management server The interval is the duration in seconds for which the AMG1312-T Series must attempt to connect with the management server to send information and check for configuration updates. Enter a value between 1 and 86400 seconds. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. ACS Password Connection Request Path Connection Request Port Connection Request UserName Connection Request Password Inform Inform Interval Apply Cancel AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 201 CHAPTER 22 System Settings 22.1 Overview This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings, such as system time, password, name, the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval. 22.1.1 What You Can Do in the System Settings Screens Use the System screen (Section 22.2 on page 202) to configure system settings. Use the Time Setting screen (Section 22.3 on page 202) to set the system time. 22.2 The System Screen Use this screen to configure system admin password. Click Maintenance > System to open the screen as shown. Figure 110 Maintenance > System The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 85 Maintenance > System DESCRIPTION LABEL Administrator Type how many seconds a management session (either via the web configurator) can be left idle before the session times out and you have to log in again. Very long idle timeouts Inactivity Timer may have security risks. A value of "0" means a management session never times out, no matter how long it has been left idle (not recommended). Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Cancel 22.3 The Time Screen Use this screen to configure the AMG1312-T Seriess time based on your local time zone. To change your AMG1312-T Seriess time and date, click Maintenance > System > Time Setting. The screen appears as shown. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 202 Figure 111 Maintenance > System > Time Setting Chapter 22 System Settings The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 86 Maintenance > System > Time LABEL Current Date/Time Current Time DESCRIPTION This field displays the time and date of your AMG1312-T Series. Time and Date Setup Manual Current Date/Time Current Time Get from Time Server Time Server Address 1/2 Time Zone Setup Time Zone Each time you reload this page, the AMG1312-T Series synchronizes the time and date with the time server. Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually. If you configure a new time and date, Time Zone and Daylight Saving at the same time, the new time and date you entered has priority and the Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings do not affect it. This field displays the last updated time (in hh:mm:ss format) from the time server or the last time configured manually. When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new time in this field and then click Apply. This field displays the last updated date (in yyyy/mm/dd format) from the time server or the last date configured manually. When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new date in this field and then click Apply. Select this radio button to have the AMG1312-T Series get the time and date from the time server you specified below. Enter the IP address or URL (up to 20 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server. Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information. Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 203 Chapter 22 System Settings Table 86 Maintenance > System > Time (continued) LABEL Daylight Savings DESCRIPTION Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening. Start Date End Date Apply Cancel Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time. Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Enable Daylight Saving. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select Second, Sunday, March and type 2 in the o'clock field. Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, March. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Enable Daylight Saving. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:

Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would select First, Sunday, November and type 2 in the o'clock field. Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select Last, Sunday, October. The time you type in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1). Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. 204 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide CHAPTER 23 Firmware Upgrade 23.1 Overview This chapter explains how to upload new firmware to your AMG1312-T Series. You can download new firmware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site (or www.zyxel.com) to use to upgrade your devices performance. Only use firmware for your devices specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your AMG1312-T Series. 23.2 The Firmware Screen Click Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade to open the following screen. The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot. Do NOT turn off the AMG1312-T Series while firmware upload is in progress!

Figure 112 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 87 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade LABEL Current Firmware Version File Path Browse... DESCRIPTION This is the present Firmware version. Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find it. Click this to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them. Click this to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes. Upload After you see the firmware updating screen, wait two minutes before logging into the AMG1312-T Series again. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 205 Chapter 23 Firmware Upgrade Figure 113 Firmware Uploading The AMG1312-T Series automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 114 Network Temporarily Disconnected After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the Status screen. If the upload was not successful, an error screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the Firmware Upgrade screen. Figure 115 Error Message 206 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide CHAPTER 24 Backup/Restore 24.1 Overview The Backup/Restore screen allows you to backup and restore device configurations. You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default. 24.2 The Backup/Restore Screen Click Maintenance > Backup/Restore. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen, as shown next. Figure 116 Maintenance > Backup/Restore Backup Configuration Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the AMG1312-T Seriess current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your AMG1312-T Series is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings. Click Backup to save the AMG1312-T Seriess current configuration to your computer. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 207 Chapter 24 Backup/Restore Restore Configuration Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your AMG1312-T Series. Table 88 Restore Configuration LABEL File Path Browse... DESCRIPTION Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse... to find it. Click this to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them. Click this to begin the upload process. Click this to reset your device settings back to the factory default. Upload Reset Do not turn off the AMG1312-T Series while configuration file upload is in progress. After the AMG1312-T Series configuration has been restored successfully, the login screen appears. Login again to restart the AMG1312-T Series. The AMG1312-T Series automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop. Figure 117 Network Temporarily Disconnected If you restore the default configuration, you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address (192.168.1.1). See Appendix A on page 229 for details on how to set up your computers IP address. If the upload was not successful, an error screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the Configuration screen. Reset to Factory Defaults Click the Reset button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the AMG1312-

T Series to its factory defaults. The following warning screen appears. Figure 118 Reset Warning Message Wait until the AMG1312-T Seriess login screen appears. You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory defaults of your AMG1312-T Series. Refer to Section 1.7 on page 18 for more information on the RESET button. 208 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 24 Backup/Restore 24.3 The Reboot Screen System restart allows you to reboot the AMG1312-T Series remotely without turning the power off. You may need to do this if the AMG1312-T Series hangs, for example. Click Maintenance > Reboot. Click the Reboot button to have the AMG1312-T Series reboot. This does not affect the AMG1312-T Series's configuration. Figure 119 Maintenance > Reboot AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 209 CHAPTER 25 Remote Management 25.1 Overview Remote management allows you to determine which services/protocols can access which AMG1312-T Series interface (if any) from which computers. The following figure shows remote management of the AMG1312-T Series coming in from the WAN. Figure 120 Remote Management From the WAN LAN WAN HTTP Telnet Note: When you configure remote management to allow management from the WAN, you still need to configure a IP filter rule to allow access. You may manage your AMG1312-T Series from a remote location via:

Internet (WAN only) LAN only LAN and WAN None (Disable) To disable remote management of a service, select Disable in the corresponding Service Access field. 25.1.1 What You Can Do in the Remote Management Screens Use the WWW screen (Section 25.2 on page 211) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use HTTP to manage the AMG1312-T Series. Use the Telnet screen (Section 25.3 on page 213) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use Telnet to manage the AMG1312-T Series. Use the FTP screen (Section 25.4 on page 213) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use FTP to access the AMG1312-T Series. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 210 Chapter 25 Remote Management Your AMG1312-T Series can act as an SNMP agent, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the AMG1312-T Series through the network. Use the SNMP screen (see Section 25.5 on page 214) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use SNMP to access the AMG1312-T Series. Use the DNS screen (Section 25.6 on page 217) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can send DNS queries to the AMG1312-T Series. Use the ICMP screen (Section 25.7 on page 217) to set whether or not your AMG1312-T Series will respond to pings and probes for services that you have not made available. Use the SSH screen (Section 25.8 on page 218) to configure through which interface(s) and from which IP address(es) users can use SSH to manage the AMG1312-T Series. 25.1.2 What You Need to Know About Remote Management Remote Management Limitations Remote management does not work when:

You have not enabled that service on the interface in the corresponding remote management screen. You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens. The IP address in the Secured Client IP Address field does not match the client IP address. If it does not match, the AMG1312-T Series will disconnect the session immediately. There is a firewall rule that blocks it. Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled:

Use the AMG1312-T Seriess WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN. Use the AMG1312-T Seriess LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN. 25.2 The WWW Screen Use this screen to specify how to connect to the AMG1312-T Series from a web browser, such as Internet Explorer. 25.2.1 Configuring the WWW Screen Click Maintenance > RemoteMGMT to display the WWW screen. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 211 Chapter 25 Remote Management Figure 121 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > WWW The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 89 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > WWW LABEL Server Port DESCRIPTION This displays the service port number for accessing the AMG1312-T Series using HTTP or HTTPS. If the number is grayed out, it is not editable. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the AMG1312-T Series using this service. Server Access Note: It is recommended if you are allowing WAN access even temporarily to change the default password (in Maintenance > User Account). To allow access from the WAN, you will need to configure a WAN to Router firewall rule. See Section 4.1 on page 34 for information on configuring firewall rules. Secured Client IP Address A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the AMG1312-T Series using this service. Select All to allow any computer to access the AMG1312-T Series using this service. Choose Range to just allow the computer(s) with an IP address in the range that you specify to access the AMG1312-T Series using this service. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Cancel 212 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 25 Remote Management 25.3 The Telnet Screen You can use Telnet to access the AMG1312-T Seriess command line interface. Specify which interfaces allow Telnet access and from which IP address the access can come. Click Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > Telnet tab to display the screen as shown. Figure 122 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > Telnet The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 90 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > Telnet LABEL Server Port DESCRIPTION This displays the service port number for accessing the AMG1312-T Series. If the number is grayed out, it is not editable. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the AMG1312-T Series using this service. Server Access Note: It is recommended if you are allowing WAN access even temporarily to change the default password (in Maintenance > User Account). To allow access from the WAN, you will need to configure a WAN to Router firewall rule. See Firewall Section on page 168 for information on configuring firewall rules. Secured Client IP Address A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the AMG1312-T Series using this service. Select All to allow any computer to access the AMG1312-T Series using this service. Choose Range to just allow the computer(s) with an IP address in the range that you specify to access the AMG1312-T Series using this service. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Cancel 25.4 The FTP Screen You can use FTP (File Transfer Protocol) to upload and download the AMG1312-T Seriess firmware and configuration files. Please see the Users Guide chapter on firmware and configuration file maintenance for details. To use this feature, your computer must have an FTP client. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 213 Chapter 25 Remote Management Use this screen to specify which interfaces allow FTP access and from which IP address the access can come. To change your AMG1312-T Seriess FTP settings, click Maintenance > RemoteMGMT

> FTP. The screen appears as shown. Figure 123 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > FTP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 91 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > FTP LABEL Server Port DESCRIPTION This displays the service port number for accessing the AMG1312-T Series. If the number is grayed out, it is not editable. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the AMG1312-T Series using this service. A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the AMG1312-T Series using this service. Select All to allow any computer to access the AMG1312-T Series using this service. Choose Range to just allow the computer(s) with an IP address in the range that you specify to access the AMG1312-T Series using this service. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Server Access Secured Client IP Address Apply Cancel 25.5 The SNMP Screen Simple Network Management Protocol is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices. Your AMG1312-T Series supports SNMP agent functionality, which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the AMG1312-T Series through the network. The AMG1312-T Series supports SNMP version one (SNMPv1) and version two (SNMPv2c). The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation. 214 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 124 SNMP Management Model Chapter 25 Remote Management An SNMP managed network consists of two main types of component: agents and a manager. An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device (the AMG1312-T Series). An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP. The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions. It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices. The managed devices contain object variables/managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device. Examples of variables include such as number of packets received, node port status etc. A Management Information Base (MIB) is a collection of managed objects. SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects. 25.5.1 Configuring SNMP To change your AMG1312-T Seriess SNMP settings, click Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > SNMP tab. The screen appears as shown. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 215 Chapter 25 Remote Management Figure 125 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > SNMP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 92 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > SNMP LABEL Server Port DESCRIPTION This displays the port the SNMP agent listens on. If the number is grayed out, it is not editable. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the AMG1312-T Series using this service. A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to access the SNMP agent on the AMG1312-T Series. Select All to allow any computer to access the SNMP agent. Choose Range to just allow the computer(s) with an IP address in the range that you specify to access the AMG1312-T Series using this service. Enter the Get Community, which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station. The default is public and allows all requests. Enter the Set community, which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station. The default is public and allows all requests. Click Apply to save your changes back to the AMG1312-T Series. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh. Server Access Secured Client IP Address Get Community Set Community Apply Cancel 216 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Chapter 25 Remote Management 25.6 The DNS Screen Use DNS (Domain Name System) to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. Use this screen to set from which IP address the AMG1312-T Series will accept DNS queries and on which interface it can send them your AMG1312-T Seriess DNS settings. This feature is not available when the AMG1312-T Series is set to bridge mode. Click Maintenance > RemoteMGMT

> DNS to change your AMG1312-T Seriess DNS settings. Figure 126 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > DNS The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 93 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > DNS LABEL Server Port DESCRIPTION This displays the service port number for accessing the AMG1312-T Series. If the number is grayed out, it is not editable. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may send DNS queries to the AMG1312-T Series. A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to send DNS queries to the AMG1312-T Series. Select All to allow any computer to send DNS queries to the AMG1312-T Series. Choose Range to just allow the computer(s) with an IP address in the range that you specify to send DNS queries to the AMG1312-T Series. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Access Status Secured Client IP Address Apply Cancel 25.7 The ICMP Screen To change your AMG1312-T Seriess security settings, click Maintenance > RemoteMGMT >

ICMP. The screen appears as shown. If an outside user attempts to probe an unsupported port on your AMG1312-T Series, an ICMP response packet is automatically returned. This allows the outside user to know the AMG1312-T Series exists. Your AMG1312-T Series supports anti-probing, which prevents the ICMP response AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 217 Chapter 25 Remote Management packet from being sent. This keeps outsiders from discovering your AMG1312-T Series when unsupported ports are probed. Note: If you want your device to respond to pings and requests for unauthorized services, you will also need to configure the firewall accordingly by disabling SPI. Figure 127 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > ICMP The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 94 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > ICMP LABEL Respond to Ping on The AMG1312-T Series will not respond to any incoming Ping requests when Disable is DESCRIPTION selected. Select LAN to reply to incoming LAN Ping requests. Select WAN to reply to incoming WAN Ping requests. Otherwise select LAN & WAN to reply to both incoming LAN and WAN Ping requests. A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to send Ping requests to the AMG1312-T Series. Select All to allow any computer to send Ping requests to the AMG1312-T Series. Choose Range to just allow the computer(s) with an IP address in the range that you specify to send Ping requests to the AMG1312-T Series. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Secured Client IP Address Apply Cancel 25.8 The SSH Screen You can use Secure SHell (SSH) to securely access the AMG1312-T Seriess command line interface. Specify which interfaces allow SSH access and from which IP address the access can come. SSH is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network. Click Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > SSH tab to display the screen as shown. 218 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 128 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > SSH Chapter 25 Remote Management The following table describes the labels in this screen. Table 95 Maintenance > RemoteMGMT > SSH LABEL Server Port DESCRIPTION This displays the service port number for accessing the AMG1312-T Series. If the number is grayed out, it is not editable. Select the interface(s) through which a computer may access the AMG1312-T Series using this service. Server Access Note: It is recommended if you are allowing WAN access even temporarily to change the default password (in Maintenance > User Account). To allow access from the WAN, you will need to configure a WAN to Router firewall rule. See Firewall Section on page 168 for information on configuring firewall rules. Secured Client IP Address A secured client is a trusted computer that is allowed to communicate with the AMG1312-T Series using this service. Select All to allow any computer to access the AMG1312-T Series using this service. Choose Range to just allow the computer(s) with an IP address in the range that you specify to access the AMG1312-T Series using this service. Click this to save your changes. Click this to restore your previously saved settings. Apply Cancel 25.8.1 SSH Example This section shows an example using a graphical interface SSH client program to remotely access the ZyXEL Device. The configuration and connection steps are similar for most SSH client programs. Refer to your SSH client program users guide. 1 Enter the IP address and port number. Select SSH. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 219 Chapter 25 Remote Management 2 A window displays prompting you to store the host key in your computer. Click Yes to continue. 3 Enter your user name and password. 4 The command line interface displays. 220 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide CHAPTER 26 Diagnostic 26.1 Overview These read-only screens display information to help you identify problems with the AMG1312-T Series. 26.1.1 What You Can Do in the Diagnostic Screens Use the Ping screen (Section 26.2 on page 221) to ping an IP address. Use the DSL Line screen (Section 26.3 on page 222) to view the DSL line statistics and reset the ADSL line. 26.2 The General Screen Use this screen to ping an IP address. Click Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping to open the screen shown next. Figure 129 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 96 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping LABEL Ping PingV6 TracerouteV6 DESCRIPTION Type the IP address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a connection. Click this to ping the IP address that you entered. Click this to ping the IPv6 address that you entered. Click this to display the route path and transmission delays between the AMG1312-T Series to the IPv6 address that you entered. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 221 Chapter 26 Diagnostic 26.3 The DSL Line Screen Use this screen to view the DSL line statistics and reset the ADSL line. Click Maintenance >

Diagnostic > DSL Line to open the screen shown next. Figure 130 Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line The following table describes the fields in this screen. Table 97 Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line LABEL ATM Status DESCRIPTION Click this to view your DSL connections Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) statistics. ATM is a networking technology that provides high-speed data transfer. ATM uses fixed-

size packets of information called cells. With ATM, a high QoS (Quality of Service) can be guaranteed. The (Segmentation and Reassembly) SAR driver translates packets into ATM cells. It also receives ATM cells and reassembles them into packets. These counters are set back to zero whenever the device starts up. inPkts is the number of good ATM cells that have been received. inDiscards is the number of received ATM cells that were rejected. inF4Pkts is the number of ATM Operations, Administration, and Management (OAM) F4 cells that have been received. See ITU recommendation I.610 for more on OAM for ATM. inF5Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F5 cells that have been received. outPkts is the number of ATM cells that have been sent. outDiscards is the number of ATM cells sent that were rejected. outF4Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F4 cells that have been sent. ATM Loopback Test outF5Pkts is the number of ATM OAM F5 cells that have been sent. Click this to start the ATM loopback test. Make sure you have configured at least one PVC with proper VPIs/VCIs before you begin this test. The AMG1312-T Series sends an OAM F5 packet to the DSLAM/ATM switch and then returns it (loops it back) to the AMG1312-T Series. The ATM loopback test is useful for troubleshooting problems with the DSLAM and ATM network. 222 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Table 97 Maintenance > Diagnostic > DSL Line (continued) LABEL DSL Line Status DESCRIPTION Click this to view statistics about the DSL connections. Chapter 26 Diagnostic noise margin downstream is the signal to noise ratio for the downstream part of the connection (coming into the AMG1312-T Series from the ISP). It is measured in decibels. The higher the number the more signal and less noise there is. output power upstream is the amount of power (in decibels) that the AMG1312-T Series is using to transmit to the ISP. attenuation downstream is the reduction in amplitude (in decibels) of the DSL signal coming into the AMG1312-T Series from the ISP. Discrete Multi-Tone (DMT) modulation divides up a lines bandwidth into sub-carriers

(sub-channels) of 4.3125 KHz each called tones. The rest of the display is the lines bit allocation. This is displayed as the number (in hexadecimal format) of bits transmitted for each tone. This can be used to determine the quality of the connection, whether a given sub-carrier loop has sufficient margins to support certain ADSL transmission rates, and possibly to determine whether particular specific types of interference or line attenuation exist. Refer to the ITU-T G.992.1 recommendation for more information on DMT. The better (or shorter) the line, the higher the number of bits transmitted for a DMT tone. The maximum number of bits that can be transmitted per DMT tone is 15. There will be some tones without any bits as there has to be space between the upstream and downstream channels. Click this to reinitialize the ADSL line. The large text box above then displays the progress and results of this operation, for example:

"Start to reset ADSL Loading ADSL modem F/W... Reset ADSL Line Successfully!"

Reset ADSL Line AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 223 CHAPTER 27 Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories. Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs AMG1312-T Series Access and Login Internet Access 27.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs The AMG1312-T Series does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on. 1 Make sure the AMG1312-T Series is turned on. 2 Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the AMG1312-T Series. 3 Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the AMG1312-T Series and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on. 4 5 Turn the AMG1312-T Series off and on. If the problem continues, contact the vendor. One of the LEDs does not behave as expected. 1 Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. Section 1.5 on page 16 LABEL WPS LED WIFI LED DESCRIPTION Green: successful connection Off: connection failure Green: WIFI active Off: WIFI inactive Check the hardware connections. Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables. 2 3 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 224 Chapter 27 Troubleshooting 4 5 Turn the AMG1312-T Series off and on. If the problem continues, contact the vendor. 27.2 AMG1312-T Series Access and Login I forgot the IP address for the AMG1312-T Series. 1 2 3 The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the AMG1312-

T Series by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the AMG1312-T Series (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address in your Internet browser. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.7 on page 18. I forgot the password. 1 2 The default admin user name and password can be found on the cover of this Users Guide. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.7 on page 18. I cannot see or access the Login screen for the web configurator. 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address. The default IP address is 192.168.1.1. If you changed the IP address (Section 8.2 on page 117), use the new IP address. If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the IP address for the AMG1312-T Series. 2 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide. 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled. See Appendix C on page 257. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 225 Chapter 27 Troubleshooting 4 5 Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the AMG1312-T Series with the default IP address. See Section 1.7 on page 18. If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestions Try to access the AMG1312-T Series using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the AMG1312-T Series, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the AMG1312-T Series does not respond to HTTP. If your computer is connected to the DSL port or is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is connected to a ETHERNET port. I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the AMG1312-T Series. 1 Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default user and default admin password can be found on the cover page of this Users Guide. The field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 2 3 4 You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the AMG1312-T Series. Log out of the AMG1312-T Series in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out. Turn the AMG1312-T Series off and on. If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See Section 1.7 on page 18. I cannot Telnet to the AMG1312-T Series. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen for the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload new firmware. See the troubleshooting suggestions for I cannot see or access the Login screen for the web configurator. Ignore the suggestions about your browser. 226 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 27.3 Internet Access I cannot access the Internet. Chapter 27 Troubleshooting 1 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 27.1 on page 225. 2 Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the wizard. These fields are case-

sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on. 3 4 If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the AP. If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure you enabled the wireless LAN and have selected the correct country and channel in which your AMG1312-T Series operates in the Wireless LAN > AP screen. 5 Disconnect all the cables from your device, and follow the directions in the Quick Start Guide again. 6 If the problem continues, contact your ISP. I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the AMG1312-T Series), but my Internet connection is not available anymore. 1 2 3 Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the Quick Start Guide and Section 27.1 on page 225. Turn the AMG1312-T Series off and on. If the problem continues, contact your ISP. The Internet connection is slow or intermittent. 1 2 There might be a lot of traffic on the network. Look at the LEDs, and check Section 27.1 on page 225. If the AMG1312-T Series is sending or receiving a lot of information, try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. Check the signal strength. If the signal strength is low, try moving your computer closer to the AMG1312-T Series if possible, and look around to see if there are any devices that might be interfering with the wireless network (for example, microwaves, other wireless networks, and so on). 3 Turn the AMG1312-T Series off and on. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 227 Chapter 27 Troubleshooting 4 If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions. Advanced Suggestions Check the settings for QoS. If it is disabled, you might consider activating it. If it is enabled, you might consider raising or lowering the priority for some applications. 228 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide APPENDIX A Setting up Your Computers IP Address All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter and TCP/IP installed. Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP/Vista, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP/IP on your computer. Windows 3.1 requires the purchase of a third-party TCP/IP application package. TCP/IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT/2000/XP, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems. After the appropriate TCP/IP components are installed, configure the TCP/IP settings in order to

"communicate" with your network. If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment, make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the AMG1312-T Seriess LAN port. Windows 95/98/Me Click Start, Settings, Control Panel and double-click the Network icon to open the Network window. Figure 131 WIndows 95/98/Me: Network: Configuration AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 229 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Installing Components The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components. You need a network adapter, the TCP/IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks. If you need the adapter:

In the Network window, click Add. Select Adapter and then click Add. Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK. If you need TCP/IP:

In the Network window, click Add. Select Protocol and then click Add. Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers. Select TCP/IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK. If you need Client for Microsoft Networks:

Click Add. Select Client and then click Add. Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers. Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK. Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect. 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 Configuring 1 2 In the Network window Configuration tab, select your network adapter's TCP/IP entry and click Properties Click the IP Address tab. If your IP address is dynamic, select Obtain an IP address automatically. If you have a static IP address, select Specify an IP address and type your information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields. 230 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 132 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: IP Address Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 3 Click the DNS Configuration tab. If you do not know your DNS information, select Disable DNS. If you know your DNS information, select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below (you may not need to fill them all in). Figure 133 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: DNS Configuration 4 Click the Gateway tab. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 231 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address If you do not know your gateways IP address, remove previously installed gateways. If you have a gateway IP address, type it in the New gateway field and click Add. 5 6 7 Click OK to save and close the TCP/IP Properties window. Click OK to close the Network window. Insert the Windows CD if prompted. Turn on your AMG1312-T Series and restart your computer when prompted. Verifying Settings 1 2 3 Click Start and then Run. In the Run window, type "winipcfg" and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window. Select your network adapter. You should see your computer's IP address, subnet mask and default gateway. Windows 2000/NT/XP The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme. 1 Click start (Start in Windows 2000/NT), Settings, Control Panel. Figure 134 Windows XP: Start Menu 2 In the Control Panel, double-click Network Connections (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows 2000/NT). 232 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 135 Windows XP: Control Panel Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 3 Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties. Figure 136 Windows XP: Control Panel: Network Connections: Properties 4 Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) (under the General tab in Win XP) and then click Properties. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 233 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Figure 137 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties 5 The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens (the General tab in Windows XP). If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically. If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields. Click Advanced. Figure 138 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties 234 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 6 If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK. Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:

In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add. In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask, and then click Add. Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add. Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways. In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric. Click Add. Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add. Click OK when finished. Figure 139 Windows XP: Advanced TCP/IP Properties 7 In the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window (the General tab in Windows XP):

Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address(es). If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields. If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 235 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Figure 140 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties 8 9 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. Click Close (OK in Windows 2000/NT) to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. 10 Close the Network Connections window (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows 2000/NT). 11 Turn on your AMG1312-T Series and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings 1 2 Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt. In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab. Windows Vista This section shows screens from Windows Vista Enterprise Version 6.0. 1 Click the Start icon, Control Panel. 236 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 141 Windows Vista: Start Menu Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 2 In the Control Panel, double-click Network and Internet. Figure 142 Windows Vista: Control Panel 3 Click Network and Sharing Center. Figure 143 Windows Vista: Network And Internet 4 Click Manage network connections. Figure 144 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 237 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 5 Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties. Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue. Figure 145 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center 6 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click Properties. Figure 146 Windows Vista: Local Area Connection Properties 7 The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens (the General tab). If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically. 238 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields. Click Advanced. Figure 147 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties 8 If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK. Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:

In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add. In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask, and then click Add. Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add. Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways. In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway. To manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric. Click Add. Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add. Click OK when finished. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 239 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Figure 148 Windows Vista: Advanced TCP/IP Properties 9 In the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window, (the General tab):

Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address(es). If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS server addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields. If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them. 240 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 149 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 10 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window. 11 Click Close to close the Local Area Connection Properties window. 12 Close the Network Connections window. 13 Turn on your AMG1312-T Series and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings 1 2 Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt. In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click Status and then click the Support tab. Macintosh OS 8/9 1 Click the Apple menu, Control Panel and double-click TCP/IP to open the TCP/IP Control Panel. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 241 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Figure 150 Macintosh OS 8/9: Apple Menu 2 Select Ethernet built-in from the Connect via list. Figure 151 Macintosh OS 8/9: TCP/IP 3 4 242 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP Server from the Configure: list. For statically assigned settings, do the following:

AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address From the Configure box, select Manually. Type your IP address in the IP Address box. Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box. Type the IP address of your AMG1312-T Series in the Router address box. 5 6 7 Close the TCP/IP Control Panel. Click Save if prompted, to save changes to your configuration. Turn on your AMG1312-T Series and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties in the TCP/IP Control Panel window. Macintosh OS X 1 Click the Apple menu, and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window. Figure 152 Macintosh OS X: Apple Menu 2 Click Network in the icon bar. Select Automatic from the Location list. Select Built-in Ethernet from the Show list. Click the TCP/IP tab. 3 For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure list. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 243 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Figure 153 Macintosh OS X: Network 4 5 6 For statically assigned settings, do the following:

From the Configure box, select Manually. Type your IP address in the IP Address box. Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box. Type the IP address of your AMG1312-T Series in the Router address box. Click Apply Now and close the window. Turn on your AMG1312-T Series and restart your computer (if prompted). Verifying Settings Check your TCP/IP properties in the Network window. Linux 244 This section shows you how to configure your computers TCP/IP settings in Red Hat Linux 9.0. Procedure, screens and file location may vary depending on your Linux distribution and release version. Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Using the K Desktop Environment (KDE) Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE. 1 Click the Red Hat button (located on the bottom left corner), select System Setting and click Network. Figure 154 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Devices 2 Double-click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure. The Ethernet Device General screen displays as shown. Figure 155 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Ethernet Device: General If you have a dynamic IP address, click Automatically obtain IP address settings with and select dhcp from the drop down list. If you have a static IP address, click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address, Subnet mask, and Default Gateway Address fields. 3 Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 245 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address 4 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network Configuration screen. Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided. Figure 156 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: DNS 5 6 Click the Devices tab. Click the Activate button to apply the changes. The following screen displays. Click Yes to save the changes in all screens. Figure 157 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Activate 7 After the network card restart process is complete, make sure the Status is Active in the Network Configuration screen. Using Configuration Files Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address. 1 246 Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer, locate the ifconfig-eth0 configuration file (where eth0 is the name of the Ethernet card). Open the configuration file with any plain text editor. If you have a dynamic IP address, enter dhcp in the BOOTPROTO= field. The following figure shows an example. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 158 Red Hat 9.0: Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address DEVICE=eth0 ONBOOT=yes BOOTPROTO=dhcp USERCTL=no PEERDNS=yes TYPE=Ethernet If you have a static IP address, enter static in the BOOTPROTO= field. Type IPADDR= followed by the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) and type NETMASK= followed by the subnet mask. The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192.168.1.10 and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0. Figure 159 Red Hat 9.0: Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0 DEVICE=eth0 ONBOOT=yes BOOTPROTO=static IPADDR=192.168.1.10 NETMASK=255.255.255.0 USERCTL=no PEERDNS=yes TYPE=Ethernet 2 3 If you know your DNS server IP address(es), enter the DNS server information in the resolv.conf file in the /etc directory. The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP addresses are specified. Figure 160 Red Hat 9.0: DNS Settings in resolv.conf nameserver 172.23.5.1 nameserver 172.23.5.2 After you edit and save the configuration files, you must restart the network card. Enter ./network restart in the /etc/rc.d/init.d directory. The following figure shows an example. Figure 161 Red Hat 9.0: Restart Ethernet Card

[root@localhost init.d]# network restart Shutting down interface eth0: [OK]

Shutting down loopback interface: [OK]

Setting network parameters: [OK]

Bringing up loopback interface: [OK]

Bringing up interface eth0: [OK]

Verifying Settings Enter ifconfig in a terminal screen to check your TCP/IP properties. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 247 Appendix A Setting up Your Computers IP Address Figure 162 Red Hat 9.0: Checking TCP/IP Properties

[root@localhost]# ifconfig eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:50:BA:72:5B:44 inet addr:172.23.19.129 Bcast:172.23.19.255 Mask:255.255.255.0 UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1 RX packets:717 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0 TX packets:13 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 collisions:0 txqueuelen:100 RX bytes:730412 (713.2 Kb) TX bytes:1570 (1.5 Kb) Interrupt:10 Base address:0x1000

[root@localhost]#

248 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide APPENDIX B IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks. IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device (including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts. Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network. You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host ID. In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name, the hosts on a network share a common network number. Similarly, as each house has its own house number, each host on the network has its own unique identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered. Structure An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for example, 192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is an eight-digit binary number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal notation). Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or 0 to 255 in decimal. The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets (192.168.1) are the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 249 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 163 Network Number and Host ID How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask. Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term subnet is short for sub-network. A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID. The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in bold text) and host ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal). Table 98 Subnet Masks IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Network Number Host ID 1ST OCTET:

(192) 11000000 11111111 11000000 2ND OCTET:

(168) 10101000 11111111 10101000 3RD OCTET:

(1) 00000001 11111111 00000001 4TH OCTET

(2) 00000010 00000000 00000010 By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits. Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits with a 1 value). For example, an 8-bit mask means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes. 250 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit and 29-bit subnet masks. Table 99 Subnet Masks BINARY 1ST OCTET 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 8-bit mask 16-bit mask 24-bit mask 29-bit mask 2ND OCTET 00000000 11111111 11111111 11111111 3RD OCTET 00000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 4TH OCTET 00000000 00000000 00000000 11111000 DECIMAL 255.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.248 Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network. The larger the number of network number bits, the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits. An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network (192.168.1.0 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network (192.168.1.255 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows:

Table 100 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK 8 bits 16 bits 24 bits 29 bits 255.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.24 8 HOST ID SIZE 24 bits 16 bits 8 bits 3 bits 224 2 216 2 28 2 23 2 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS 16777214 65534 254 6 Notation Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a /

followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address. For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask 255.255.255.128. The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations. Table 101 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192 ALTERNATIVE NOTATION

/24

/25

/26 LAST OCTET

(BINARY) 0000 0000 1000 0000 1100 0000 LAST OCTET

(DECIMAL) 0 128 192 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 251 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 101 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation (continued) SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.224 255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.252 ALTERNATIVE NOTATION

/27

/28

/29

/30 LAST OCTET

(BINARY) 1110 0000 1111 0000 1111 1000 1111 1100 LAST OCTET

(DECIMAL) 224 240 248 252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the following example a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons. In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three octets of the address

(192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum of 28 2 or 254 possible hosts. The following figure shows the company network before subnetting. Figure 164 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate sub-

networks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or /25). The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two subnets; 192.168.1.0 /25 and 192.168.1.128 /25. The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now two sub-

networks, A and B. 252 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 165 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126 possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnets address itself, all ones is the subnets broadcast address). 192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask 255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126. Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254. Example: Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit address into two subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets, you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01, 10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits

(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192. Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 26 - 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnets broadcast address). Table 102 Subnet 1 IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER IP Address (Decimal) IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:

192.168.1.0 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.63 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 11111111.11111111.11111111. Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 0 00000000 11000000 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 253 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 103 Subnet 2 IP/SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:

192.168.1.64 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.127 Table 104 Subnet 3 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:

192.168.1.128 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.191 Table 105 Subnet 4 IP/SUBNET MASK IP Address IP Address (Binary) Subnet Mask (Binary) Subnet Address:

192.168.1.192 Broadcast Address:

192.168.1.255 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 11111111.11111111.11111111. Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126 NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 11111111.11111111.11111111. Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190 NETWORK NUMBER 192.168.1. 11000000.10101000.00000001. 11111111.11111111.11111111. Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193 Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 64 01000000 11000000 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 128 10000000 11000000 LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 192 11000000 11000000 Example: Eight Subnets Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100, 101, 110 and 111). The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet. SUBNET Table 106 Eight Subnets SUBNET ADDRESS 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FIRST ADDRESS 1 33 65 97 129 161 193 225 LAST ADDRESS 30 62 94 126 158 190 222 254 BROADCAST ADDRESS 31 63 95 127 159 191 223 255 254 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit network number. Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting NO. SUBNETS SUBNET MASK Table 107 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 255.255.255.128 (/25) 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 255.255.255.254 (/31) 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 NO. HOSTS PER SUBNET 126 62 30 14 6 2 1 The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit network number. NO. SUBNETS SUBNET MASK Table 108 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO. BORROWED HOST BITS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 255.255.128.0 (/17) 255.255.192.0 (/18) 255.255.224.0 (/19) 255.255.240.0 (/20) 255.255.248.0 (/21) 255.255.252.0 (/22) 255.255.254.0 (/23) 255.255.255.0 (/24) 255.255.255.128 (/25) 255.255.255.192 (/26) 255.255.255.224 (/27) 255.255.255.240 (/28) 255.255.255.248 (/29) 255.255.255.252 (/30) 255.255.255.254 (/31) 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 NO. HOSTS PER SUBNET 32766 16382 8190 4094 2046 1022 510 254 126 62 30 14 6 2 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask. If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You must also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the AMG1312-T Series. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 255 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your AMG1312-T Series that is easy to remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address. The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your AMG1312-T Series will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the AMG1312-T Series unless you are instructed to do otherwise. Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example) you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:

10.0.0.0 10.255.255.255 172.16.0.0 172.31.255.255 192.168.0.0 192.168.255.255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses. Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466, Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space. 256 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide APPENDIX C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:

Web browser pop-up windows from your device. JavaScripts (enabled by default). Java permissions (enabled by default). Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary. Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device. Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your devices IP address. Disable Pop-up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop-up Blocker. Figure 166 Pop-up Blocker You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab. 1 2 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy. Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen. This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 257 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 167 Internet Options: Privacy 3 Click Apply to save this setting. Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps. 1 2 In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab. Select Settingsto open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen. 258 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 168 Internet Options: Privacy 3 4 Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix http://. For example, http://192.168.167.1. Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites. Figure 169 Pop-up Blocker Settings AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 259 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions 5 6 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen. Click Apply to save this setting. JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScripts are allowed. 1 In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. Figure 170 Internet Options: Security 2 3 Click the Custom Level... button. Scroll down to Scripting. 4 Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 5 Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default). 6 Click OK to close the window. 260 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 171 Security Settings - Java Scripting Java Permissions 1 2 3 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab. Click the Custom Level... button. Scroll down to Microsoft VM. 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected. 5 Click OK to close the window. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 261 Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Figure 172 Security Settings - Java JAVA (Sun) 1 From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab. 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected. 3 Click OK to close the window. Figure 173 Java (Sun) 262 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions Mozilla Firefox Mozilla Firefox 2.0 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary. You can enable Java, Javascripts and pop-ups in one screen. Click Tools, then click Options in the screen that appears. Figure 174 Mozilla Firefox: Tools > Options Click Content to show the screen below. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen. Figure 175 Mozilla Firefox Content Security AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 263 APPENDIX D Wireless LANs Wireless LAN Topologies This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies. Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad-hoc wireless LAN. Figure 176 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network BSS A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP). Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 264 Figure 177 Basic Service Set Appendix D Wireless LANs ESS An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System (DS). This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 265 Appendix D Wireless LANs Figure 178 Infrastructure WLAN Channel RTS/CTS A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data. Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your region) so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance. Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent AP is using channel 1, then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11. A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a hidden node. Both stations (STA) are within range of the access point (AP) or wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore, they are considered hidden from each other. 266 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Figure 179 RTS/CTS Appendix D Wireless LANs When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations. RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is invoked. When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS (Request To Send) message to the AP for permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission. Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS

(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS

(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake. If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy. Fragmentation Threshold A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes) that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames. A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference. If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 267 Appendix D Wireless LANs Preamble Type Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet. Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short preamble. Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks. Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide more efficient communications. Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it, otherwise the AMG1312-T Series uses long preamble. Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate. IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an IEEE 802.11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point (and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates. The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:

Table 109 IEEE 802.11g DATA RATE (MBPS) MODULATION 1 2 5.5 / 11 6/9/12/18/24/36/48/

54 DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed) DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) CCK (Complementary Code Keying) OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) Wireless Security Overview Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients, access points and the wired network. Wireless security methods available on the AMG1312-T Series are data encryption, wireless client authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the AMG1312-T Series identity. 268 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your AMG1312-T Series. Appendix D Wireless LANs Table 110 Wireless Security Levels SECURITY LEVEL Least Secure SECURITY TYPE Unique SSID (Default) Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled MAC Address Filtering WEP Encryption IEEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server Authentication Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) WPA2 Most Secure Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the AMG1312-T Series and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it. IEEE 802.1x In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of IEEE 802.11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x are:

User based identification that allows for roaming. Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138, 2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network RADIUS server. Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients. RADIUS RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server handles the following tasks:

Authentication Determines the identity of the users. Authorization Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network. Accounting Keeps track of the clients network activity. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 269 Appendix D Wireless LANs RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server. Types of RADIUS Messages The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication:

Access-Request Sent by an access point requesting authentication. Access-Reject Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access. Access-Accept Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access. Access-Challenge Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access. The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another Access-Request message. The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting:

Accounting-Request Sent by the access point requesting accounting. Accounting-Response Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting. In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access. Types of EAP Authentication This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP and LEAP. Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types. EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802.1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication. By using EAP to interact with an EAP-compatible RADIUS server, an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication. The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP(s) that supports IEEE 802.1x. For EAP-TLS authentication type, you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate(s) from a certificate authority (CA). A certificate (also called digital IDs) can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. 270 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5) MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client proves that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in plain text. However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication. Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption. EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security) With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client. After validating the identity of the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the senders identity. However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which imposes a management overhead. EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service) EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server-

side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client authentication, EAP-TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2. PEAP (Protected EAP) Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients, thus hiding client identity. However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5, EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is implemented only by Cisco. LEAP LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of IEEE 802.1x. Dynamic WEP Key Exchange The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 271 Appendix D Wireless LANs If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen. You may still configure and store keys, but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled. Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and PEAP) use dynamic keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types. Table 111 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types EAP-TLS Yes Yes Yes Yes Strong Hard No Mutual Authentication Certificate Client Certificate Server Dynamic Key Exchange Credential Integrity Deployment Difficulty Client Identity Protection EAP-MD5 No No No No None Easy No EAP-TTLS Yes Optional Yes Yes Strong Moderate Yes PEAP Yes Optional Yes Yes Strong Moderate Yes LEAP Yes No No Yes Moderate Moderate No WPA and WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA. Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication. If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external RADIUS server, use WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN. If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not. Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2. WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2. Encryption WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP), Message Integrity Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA2 also uses TKIP when required for compatibility reasons, but offers stronger encryption than TKIP with Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP). TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm 272 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Appendix D Wireless LANs called Rijndael. They both include a per-packet key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check

(MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying mechanism. WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice. The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. This all happens in the background automatically. The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets, altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped. By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi-Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network. The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force password-guessing attacks but its still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent, single, alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a weakness of WEP) User Authentication WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake) and shortens the time required to connect to a network. Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and pre-authentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices. Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again. Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it. Wireless Client WPA Supplicants A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP, Funk Software's Odyssey client. The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows XP's built-in "Zero Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows XP to use it. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 273 Appendix D Wireless LANs WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example To set up WPA(2), you need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number (default is 1812), and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system. 1 2 3 4 The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly. A 256-bit Pairwise Master Key (PMK) is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client. The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP. The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys. The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. Figure 180 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example WPA(2)-PSK Application Example A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows. 1 2 3 First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared Key (PSK) must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters (including spaces and symbols). The AP checks each wireless client's password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches. The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key). The key itself is not sent over the network, but is derived from the PSK and the SSID. 274 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 4 The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process, the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys. They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them. Figure 181 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication Appendix D Wireless LANs Security Parameters Summary Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features. Table 112 Wireless Security Relational Matrix AUTHENTICATION METHOD/ KEY MANAGEMENT PROTOCOL Open ENCRYPTIO N METHOD None No ENTER MANUAL KEY Open Shared WPA WPA-PSK WPA2 WPA2-PSK Antenna Overview WEP WEP TKIP/AES TKIP/AES TKIP/AES TKIP/AES No Yes Yes No Yes Yes No Yes No Yes IEEE 802.1X Disable Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable with Dynamic WEP Key Enable without Dynamic WEP Key Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable An antenna couples RF signals onto air. A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna, which propagates the signal through the air. The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air. Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 275 Appendix D Wireless LANs Antenna Characteristics Frequency An antenna in the frequency of 2.4GHz (IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g) or 5GHz (IEEE 802.11a) is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN Radiation Pattern A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antennas coverage area. Antenna Gain Antenna gain, measured in dB (decibel), is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width. Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications. For an indoor site, each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 2.5%. For an unobstructed outdoor site, each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 5%. Actual results may vary depending on the network environment. Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi, which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna. An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions. dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides. Types of Antennas for WLAN There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications. Omni-directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane. The coverage area is torus-shaped (like a donut) which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment. With a wide coverage area, it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points. Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam, like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb. The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern. Angles typically range from 20 degrees (very directional) to 120 degrees (less directional). Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point-to-point applications. Positioning Antennas In general, antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions. In point-topoint application, position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a table, desk, and so on, point the antenna up. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling, point the antenna down. For a single AP application, place omni-directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible. For directional antennas, point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area. 276 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide APPENDIX E IPv6 Overview IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), is designed to enhance IP address size and features. The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits (from the 32-bit IPv4 address) allows up to 3.4 x 1038 IP addresses. IPv6 Addressing The 128-bit IPv6 address is written as eight 16-bit hexadecimal blocks separated by colons (:). This is an example IPv6 address 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000. IPv6 addresses can be abbreviated in two ways:

Leading zeros in a block can be omitted. So 2001:0db8:1a2b:0015:0000:0000:1a2f:0000 can be written as 2001:db8:1a2b:15:0:0:1a2f:0. Any number of consecutive blocks of zeros can be replaced by a double colon. A double colon can only appear once in an IPv6 address. So 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f:0000:0000:0015 can be written as 2001:0db8::1a2f:0000:0000:0015, 2001:0db8:0000:0000:1a2f::0015, 2001:db8::1a2f:0:0:15 or 2001:db8:0:0:1a2f::15. Prefix and Prefix Length Similar to an IPv4 subnet mask, IPv6 uses an address prefix to represent the network address. An IPv6 prefix length specifies how many most significant bits (start from the left) in the address compose the network address. The prefix length is written as /x where x is a number. For example, 2001:db8:1a2b:15::1a2f:0/32 means that the first 32 bits (2001:db8) is the subnet prefix. Link-local Address A link-local address uniquely identifies a device on the local network (the LAN). It is similar to a private IP address in IPv4. You can have the same link-local address on multiple interfaces on a device. A link-local unicast address has a predefined prefix of fe80::/10. The link-local unicast address format is as follows. Table 113 Link-local Unicast Address Format 1111 1110 10 10 bits Interface ID 64 bits 0 54 bits AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 277 Appendix E IPv6 Global Address A global address uniquely identifies a device on the Internet. It is similar to a public IP address in IPv4. A global unicast address starts with a 2 or 3. Unspecified Address An unspecified address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 or ::) is used as the source address when a device does not have its own address. It is similar to 0.0.0.0 in IPv4. Loopback Address A loopback address (0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 or ::1) allows a host to send packets to itself. It is similar to 127.0.0.1 in IPv4. Multicast Address In IPv6, multicast addresses provide the same functionality as IPv4 broadcast addresses. Broadcasting is not supported in IPv6. A multicast address allows a host to send packets to all hosts in a multicast group. Multicast scope allows you to determine the size of the multicast group. A multicast address has a predefined prefix of ff00::/8. The following table describes some of the predefined multicast addresses. Table 114 Predefined Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:2 FF05:0:0:0:0:0:1:3 DESCRIPTION All hosts on a local node. All routers on a local node. All hosts on a local connected link. All routers on a local connected link. All routers on a local site. All DHCP severs on a local site. The following table describes the multicast addresses which are reserved and can not be assigned to a multicast group. Table 115 Reserved Multicast Address MULTICAST ADDRESS FF00:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF01:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF02:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF03:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF04:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF05:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF06:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF07:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 278 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Table 115 Reserved Multicast Address (continued) Appendix E IPv6 MULTICAST ADDRESS FF08:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF09:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0A:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0B:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0C:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0D:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0E:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 FF0F:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 Subnet Masking Both an IPv6 address and IPv6 subnet mask compose of 128-bit binary digits, which are divided into eight 16-bit blocks and written in hexadecimal notation. Hexadecimal uses four bits for each character (1 ~ 10, A ~ F). Each blocks 16 bits are then represented by four hexadecimal characters. For example, FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FC00:0000:0000:0000. Interface ID In IPv6, an interface ID is a 64-bit identifier. It identifies a physical interface (for example, an Ethernet port) or a virtual interface (for example, the management IP address for a VLAN). One interface should have a unique interface ID. EUI-64 The EUI-64 (Extended Unique Identifier) defined by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) is an interface ID format designed to adapt with IPv6. It is derived from the 48-bit (6-

byte) Ethernet MAC address as shown next. EUI-64 inserts the hex digits fffe between the third and fourth bytes of the MAC address and complements the seventh bit of the first byte of the MAC address. See the following example. MAC 00 : 13

: 49

: 12

: 34

: 56 EUI-64 02 : 13

: 49

: FF

: FE

: 12

: 34

: 56 Stateless Autoconfiguration With stateless autoconfiguration in IPv6, addresses can be uniquely and automatically generated. Unlike DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version six) which is used in IPv6 stateful autoconfiguration, the owner and status of addresses dont need to be maintained by a DHCP server. Every IPv6 device is able to generate its own and unique IP address automatically when IPv6 is initiated on its interface. It combines the prefix and the interface ID (generated from its own Ethernet MAC address, see Interface ID and EUI-64) to form a complete IPv6 address. When IPv6 is enabled on a device, its interface automatically generates a link-local address

(beginning with fe80). When the interface is connected to a network with a router and the AMG1312-T Series is set to automatically obtain an IPv6 network prefix from the router for the interface, it generates 3another AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 279 Appendix E IPv6 address which combines its interface ID and global and subnet information advertised from the router. This is a routable global IP address. DHCPv6 The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6, RFC 3315) is a server-client protocol that allows a DHCP server to assign and pass IPv6 network addresses, prefixes and other configuration information to DHCP clients. DHCPv6 servers and clients exchange DHCP messages using UDP. Each DHCP client and server has a unique DHCP Unique IDentifier (DUID), which is used for identification when they are exchanging DHCPv6 messages. The DUID is generated from the MAC address, time, vendor assigned ID and/or the vendor's private enterprise number registered with the IANA. It should not change over time even after you reboot the device. Identity Association An Identity Association (IA) is a collection of addresses assigned to a DHCP client, through which the server and client can manage a set of related IP addresses. Each IA must be associated with exactly one interface. The DHCP client uses the IA assigned to an interface to obtain configuration from a DHCP server for that interface. Each IA consists of a unique IAID and associated IP information. The IA type is the type of address in the IA. Each IA holds one type of address. IA_NA means an identity association for non-temporary addresses and IA_TA is an identity association for temporary addresses. An IA_NA option contains the T1 and T2 fields, but an IA_TA option does not. The DHCPv6 server uses T1 and T2 to control the time at which the client contacts with the server to extend the lifetimes on any addresses in the IA_NA before the lifetimes expire. After T1, the client sends the server (S1) (from which the addresses in the IA_NA were obtained) a Renew message. If the time T2 is reached and the server does not respond, the client sends a Rebind message to any available server (S2). For an IA_TA, the client may send a Renew or Rebind message at the client's discretion. T1 T2 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Renew to S1 Rebind to S2 Rebind to S2 DHCP Relay Agent A DHCP relay agent is on the same network as the DHCP clients and helps forward messages between the DHCP server and clients. When a client cannot use its link-local address and a well-

known multicast address to locate a DHCP server on its network, it then needs a DHCP relay agent to send a message to a DHCP server that is not attached to the same network. The DHCP relay agent can add the remote identification (remote-ID) option and the interface-ID option to the Relay-Forward DHCPv6 messages. The remote-ID option carries a user-defined string, 3. In IPv6, all network interfaces can be associated with several addresses. 280 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Appendix E IPv6 such as the system name. The interface-ID option provides slot number, port information and the VLAN ID to the DHCPv6 server. The remote-ID option (if any) is stripped from the Relay-Reply messages before the relay agent sends the packets to the clients. The DHCP server copies the interface-ID option from the Relay-Forward message into the Relay-Reply message and sends it to the relay agent. The interface-ID should not change even after the relay agent restarts. Prefix Delegation Prefix delegation enables an IPv6 router to use the IPv6 prefix (network address) received from the ISP (or a connected uplink router) for its LAN. The AMG1312-T Series uses the received IPv6 prefix

(for example, 2001:db2::/48) to generate its LAN IP address. Through sending Router Advertisements (RAs) regularly by multicast, the AMG1312-T Series passes the IPv6 prefix information to its LAN hosts. The hosts then can use the prefix to generate their IPv6 addresses. ICMPv6 Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 (ICMPv6 or ICMP for IPv6) is defined in RFC 4443. ICMPv6 has a preceding Next Header value of 58, which is different from the value used to identify ICMP for IPv4. ICMPv6 is an integral part of IPv6. IPv6 nodes use ICMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet processing and perform other diagnostic functions, such as "ping". Multicast Listener Discovery The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) protocol (defined in RFC 2710) is derived from IPv4's Internet Group Management Protocol version 2 (IGMPv2). MLD uses ICMPv6 message types, rather than IGMP message types. MLDv1 is equivalent to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 is equivalent to IGMPv3. MLD allows an IPv6 switch or router to discover the presence of MLD listeners who wish to receive multicast packets and the IP addresses of multicast groups the hosts want to join on its network. MLD snooping and MLD proxy are analogous to IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy in IPv4. MLD filtering controls which multicast groups a port can join. MLD Messages A multicast router or switch periodically sends general queries to MLD hosts to update the multicast forwarding table. When an MLD host wants to join a multicast group, it sends an MLD Report message for that address. An MLD Done message is equivalent to an IGMP Leave message. When an MLD host wants to leave a multicast group, it can send a Done message to the router or switch. The router or switch then sends a group-specific query to the port on which the Done message is received to determine if other devices connected to this port should remain in the group. Transition Techniques IPv6 Over IPv4 Tunnelling To route traffic between two IPv6 networks over an IPv4 network, an IPv6 over IPv4 tunnel has to be used. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 281 Appendix E IPv6 On the AMG1312-T Series, you can either set up a configured tunnel or an automatic 6to4 tunnel. The following describes each method. Configured Tunnel A configured tunnel is a point-to-point tunnelling mechanism that encapsulates an IPv6 address with an IPv4 address. Routers (A and B) on both IPv6 networks (1 and 2) each must have an interface that connects to the IPv4 network (with an IPv4 address). This allows the router to send and receive IPv6 data over the IPv4 network. In this case, you must specify Bs public IPv4 address on A (similarly, specify As public IPv4 address on B) in order for packets to arrive at the intended destination through the IPv4 network. Figure 182 Configured Tunnel Example 6to4 Tunnel A 6to4 tunnel is an automatic tunnelling mechanism that provides connection between IPv6 networks across an IPv4 network. To transmit IPv6 packets over an IPv4 network, the IPv6 packets are encapsulated inside IPv4 packets. The following figure shows a network example. Figure 183 6to4 Relay Router Network Example In a 6to4 tunnel, 6to4 routers (A and B in the example network) forward these packets between IPv6 networks (1 and 2) over the IPv4 Internet. A 6to4 relay router (C) connects to both an IPv6 and IPv4 network. A 6to4 relay router is used to forward packets between 6to4 routers in an IPv4 Internet and an IPv6 device (Z) on the IPv6 Internet. To transmit packets, a 6to4 address is used with a special IPv6 prefix of 2002:: to encode a given IPv4 address. A 6to4 address has the following format:

2002:IPv4 address:subnet ID:host ID/64 282 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Appendix E IPv6 For example, if you have an IPv4 address of 192.168.1.1 (first converted to binary notation and then to the colon hexadecimal representation of c0a8:0101), then the 6to4 addresses is 2002:c0a8:0101::1/

64. Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows XP/2003/Vista By default, Windows XP and Windows 2003 support IPv6. This example shows you how to use the ipv6 install command on Windows XP/2003 to enable IPv6. This also displays how to use the ipconfig command to see auto-generated IP addresses. C:\>ipv6 install Installing... Succeeded. C:\>ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:

Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :

IP Address. : 10.1.1.46 Subnet Mask . : 255.255.255.0 IP Address. : fe80::2d0:59ff:feb8:103c%4 Default Gateway . : 10.1.1.254 IPv6 is installed and enabled by default in Windows Vista. Use the ipconfig command to check your automatic configured IPv6 address as well. You should see at least one IPv6 address available for the interface on your computer. Example - Enabling DHCPv6 on Windows XP Windows XP does not support DHCPv6. If your network uses DHCPv6 for IP address assignment, you have to additionally install a DHCPv6 client software on your Windows XP. (Note: If you use static IP addresses or Router Advertisement for IPv6 address assignment in your network, ignore this section.) This example uses Dibbler as the DHCPv6 client. To enable DHCPv6 client on your computer:

1 2 3 Install Dibbler and select the DHCPv6 client option on your computer. After the installation is complete, select Start > All Programs > Dibbler-DHCPv6 > Client Install as service. Select Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services. 4 Double click Dibbler - a DHCPv6 client. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 283 Appendix E IPv6 5 Click Start and then OK. 6 Now your computer can obtain an IPv6 address from a DHCPv6 server. Example - Enabling IPv6 on Windows 7 Windows 7 supports IPv6 by default. DHCPv6 is also enabled when you enable IPv6 on a Windows 7 computer. To enable IPv6 in Windows 7:

Select Control Panel > Network and Sharing Center > Local Area Connection. Select the Internet Protocol Version 6 (TCP/IPv6) checkbox to enable it. Click OK to save the change. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 1 2 3 284 Appendix E IPv6 4 5 Click Close to exit the Local Area Connection Status screen. Select Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. 6 Use the ipconfig command to check your dynamic IPv6 address. This example shows a global address (2001:b021:2d::1000) obtained from a DHCP server. C:\>ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:

Connection-specific DNS Suffix . :

IPv6 Address. : 2001:b021:2d::1000 Link-local IPv6 Address . : fe80::25d8:dcab:c80a:5189%11 IPv4 Address. : 172.16.100.61 Subnet Mask . : 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway . : fe80::213:49ff:feaa:7125%11 172.16.100.254 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 285 APPENDIX F Services The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port numbers. Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a different one, if you like. Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/UDP, then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is USER-DEFINED, the Port(s) is the IP protocol number, not the port number. Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol. If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number. If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number. Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 286 Appendix F Services Table 116 Examples of Services NAME PROTOCOL AH (IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined PORT(S) 51 AIM AUTH BGP BOOTP_CLIENT BOOTP_SERVER CU-SEEME DNS TCP TCP TCP UDP UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP ESP

(IPSEC_TUNNEL) User-Defined FINGER FTP H.323 HTTP HTTPS ICMP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP User-Defined ICQ IGMP (MULTICAST) UDP User-Defined IKE IMAP4 IMAP4S IRC UDP TCP TCP TCP/UDP MSN Messenger TCP NetBIOS TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP TCP/UDP 5190 113 179 68 67 7648 24032 53 50 79 20 21 1720 80 443 1 4000 2 500 143 993 6667 1863 137 138 139 445 DESCRIPTION The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling protocol uses this service. AOLs Internet Messenger service. Authentication protocol used by some servers. Border Gateway Protocol. DHCP Client. DHCP Server. A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software. Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (for instance www.zyxel.com) to IP numbers. The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation Security Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service. Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on. File Transfer Protocol, a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail. NetMeeting uses this protocol. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/

server protocol for the world wide web. HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-commerce. Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic purposes. This is a popular Internet chat program. Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts. The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management. The Internet Message Access Protocol is used for e-mail. This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that runs over SSL. This is another popular Internet chat program. Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol. The Network Basic Input/Output System is used for communication between computers in a LAN. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 287 Appendix F Services Table 116 Examples of Services (continued) NAME NEW-ICQ NEWS NFS NNTP PING POP3 POP3S PPTP PROTOCOL TCP TCP UDP PORT(S) 5190 144 2049 TCP 119 User-Defined 1 TCP TCP TCP 110 995 1723 PPTP_TUNNEL (GRE) User-Defined 47 RCMD REAL_AUDIO REXEC RLOGIN ROADRUNNER RTELNET RTSP SFTP SMTP SMTPS TCP TCP TCP TCP TCP/UDP TCP TCP/UDP TCP TCP TCP SNMP SNMP-TRAPS TCP/UDP TCP/UDP 512 7070 514 513 1026 107 554 115 25 465 161 162 DESCRIPTION An Internet chat program. A protocol for news groups. Network File System - NFS is a client/

server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments. Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service. Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable. Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e-mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other). This is a more secure version of POP3 that runs over SSL. Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel. PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel. Remote Command Service. A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web. Remote Execution Daemon. Remote Login. This is an ISP that provides services mainly for cable modems. Remote Telnet. The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet. The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old way of transferring files between computers. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another. This is a more secure version of SMTP that runs over SSL. Simple Network Management Program. Traps for use with the SNMP (RFC:1215). 288 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Appendix F Services Table 116 Examples of Services (continued) NAME SQL-NET PROTOCOL TCP PORT(S) 1521 SSDP SSH STRM WORKS SYSLOG TACACS TELNET VDOLIVE UDP TCP/UDP UDP UDP UDP TCP TCP UDP 1900 22 1558 514 49 23 7000 user-

defined DESCRIPTION Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers. The Simple Service Discovery Protocol supports Universal Plug-and-Play (UPnP). Secure Shell Remote Login Program. Stream Works Protocol. Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server. Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal Access Controller Access Control System). Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/

IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems. A videoconferencing solution. The UDP port number is specified in the application. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 289 APPENDIX G Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2013 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation. Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved. Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice. Trademarks ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners. Certifications Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations. This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 1 2 3 4 FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g or 802.11n(20MHz) operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1 through 11. IEEE 802.11n(40MHz) operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmware-limited to channels 1 through 7. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Note: only channels 1 to 11 (frequency band 2.412 GHz to 2.462 GHz) are available for use in the United States of America.

AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 290 Appendix G Legal Information Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. Viewing Certifications Go to www.zyxel.com to view the products documents and certifications. ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. Note Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser. To obtain the services of this warranty, contact ZyXEL's Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number (RMA). Products must be returned Postage Prepaid. It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped. Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out-dated warranty will be repaired or replaced (at the discretion of ZyXEL) and the customer will be billed for parts and labor. All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address, Postage Paid. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country. Registration Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for North American products. Regulatory Information European Union The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union. Declaration of Conformity with Regard to EU Directive 1999/5/EC (R&TTE Directive) Compliance Information for 2.4GHz and 5GHz Wireless Products Relevant to the EU and Other Countries Following the EU Directive 1999/5/EC

(R&TTE Directive)

[Czech]

[Danish]

[German]

[Estonian]

English

[Spanish]

[Greek]

[French]

[Italian]

[Latvian]

[Lithuanian]

[Dutch]

[Maltese]

ZyXEL tmto prohlauje, e tento zazen je ve shod se zkladnmi poadavky a dalmi pslunmi ustanovenmi smrnice 1999/5/EC. Undertegnede ZyXEL erklrer herved, at flgende udstyr udstyr overholder de vsentlige krav og vrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Hiermit erklrt ZyXEL, dass sich das Gert Ausstattung in bereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den brigen einschlgigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU befindet. Kesolevaga kinnitab ZyXEL seadme seadmed vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/E phinuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele stetele. Hereby, ZyXEL declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Por medio de la presente ZyXEL declara que el equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE. ZyXEL 1999/5/C. Par la prsente ZyXEL dclare que l'appareil quipements est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/EC. Con la presente ZyXEL dichiara che questo attrezzatura conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE. Ar o ZyXEL deklar, ka iekrtas atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem. iuo ZyXEL deklaruoja, kad is ranga atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas. Hierbij verklaart ZyXEL dat het toestel uitrusting in overeenstemming is met de essentile eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EC. Hawnhekk, ZyXEL, jiddikjara li dan tagmir jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 291 Appendix G Legal Information

[Hungarian]

[Polish]

[Portuguese]

[Slovenian]

[Slovak]

[Finnish]

[Swedish]

[Bulgarian]

[Icelandic]

[Norwegian]

[Romanian]

Alulrott, ZyXEL nyilatkozom, hogy a berendezs megfelel a vonatkoz alapvet kvetelmnyeknek s az 1999/5/EK irnyelv egyb elrsainak. Niniejszym ZyXEL owiadcza, e sprzt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostaymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL declara que este equipamento est conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposies da Directiva 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL izjavlja, da je ta oprema v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi doloili direktive 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL tmto vyhlasuje, e zariadenia spa zkladn poiadavky a vetky prslun ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL vakuuttaa tten ett laitteet tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sit koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen. Hrmed intygar ZyXEL att denna utrustning str I verensstmmelse med de vsentliga egenskapskrav och vriga relevanta bestmmelser som framgr av direktiv 1999/5/EC. ZyXEL , 1999/5/C. Hr me lsir, ZyXEL v yfir a essi bnaur er samrmi vi grunnkrfur og nnur vieigandi kvi tilskipunar 1999/5/EC. Erklrer herved ZyXEL at dette utstyret er I samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og andre relevante bestemmelser I direktiv 1999/5/EF. Prin prezenta, ZyXEL declar c acest echipament este n conformitate cu cerinele eseniale i alte prevederi relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/EC. National Restrictions This product may be used in all EU countries (and other countries following the EU directive 1999/5/EC) without any limitation except for the countries mentioned below:

Ce produit peut tre utilis dans tous les pays de lUE (et dans tous les pays ayant transposs la directive 1999/5/CE) sans aucune limitation, except pour les pays mentionns ci-dessous:

Questo prodotto utilizzabile in tutte i paesi EU (ed in tutti gli altri paesi che seguono le direttive EU 1999/5/EC) senza nessuna limitazione, eccetto per i paesii menzionati di seguito:

Das Produkt kann in allen EU Staaten ohne Einschrnkungen eingesetzt werden (sowie in anderen Staaten die der EU Direktive 1995/5/CE folgen) mit Aunahme der folgenden aufgefhrten Staaten:

In the majority of the EU and other European countries,the 2,4- and 5-GHz bands have been made available for the use of wireless local area networks (LANs). Later in this document you will find an overview of countries inwhich additional restrictions or requirements or both are applicable. The requirements for any country may evolve. ZyXEL recommends that you check with the local authorities for the latest status of their national regulations for both the 2,4- and 5-GHz wireless LANs. The following countries have restrictions and/or requirements in addition to those given in the table labeled Overview of Regulatory Requirements for Wireless LANs:. Overview of Regulatory Requirements for Wireless LANs Indoor ONLY Indoor and Outdoor Frequency Band (MHz) 2400-2483.5 5150-5350 5470-5725 Max Power Level

(EIRP)1 (mW) 100 200 1000 V V V Belgium The Belgian Institute for Postal Services and Telecommunications (BIPT) must be notified of any outdoor wireless link having a range exceeding 300 meters. Please check http://www.bipt.be for more details. Draadloze verbindingen voor buitengebruik en met een reikwijdte van meer dan 300 meter dienen aangemeld te worden bij het Belgisch Instituut voor postdiensten en telecommunicatie (BIPT). Zie http://www.bipt.be voor meer gegevens. Les liaisons sans fil pour une utilisation en extrieur dune distance suprieure 300 mtres doivent tre notifies lInstitut Belge des services Postaux et des Tlcommunications (IBPT). Visitez http://www.ibpt.be pour de plus amples dtails. Denmark In Denmark, the band 5150 - 5350 MHz is also allowed for outdoor usage. I Danmark m frekvensbndet 5150 - 5350 ogs anvendes udendrs. Italy 292 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Appendix G Legal Information This product meets the National Radio Interface and the requirements specified in the National Frequency Allocation Table for Italy. Unless this wireless LAN product is operating within the boundaries of the owner's property, its use requires a general authorization. Please check http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ for more details. Questo prodotto conforme alla specifiche di Interfaccia Radio Nazionali e rispetta il Piano Nazionale di ripartizione delle frequenze in Italia. Se non viene installato all 'interno del proprio fondo, l'utilizzo di prodotti Wireless LAN richiede una Autorizzazione Generale. Consultare http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/ per maggiori dettagli. Latvia The outdoor usage of the 2.4 GHz band requires an authorization from the Electronic Communications Office. Please check http://

www.esd.lv for more details. 2.4 GHz frekvenu joslas izmantoanai rpus telpm nepiecieama atauja no Elektronisko sakaru direkcijas. Vairk informcijas: http://www.esd.lv. Notes:

1. Although Norway, Switzerland and Liechtenstein are not EU member states, the EU Directive 1999/5/EC has also been implemented in those countries. 2. The regulatory limits for maximum output power are specified in EIRP. The EIRP level (in dBm) of a device can be calculated by adding the gain of the antenna used(specified in dBi) to the output power available at the connector (specified in dBm). Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids. Do NOT store things on the device. Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device. Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information. Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports. Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them. Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling. Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device. Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord. If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source. Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution. Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one. Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device. Use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord. Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s). Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately. AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 293 Index Index Numbers 802.1p 145 A activation CWMP 201 dynamic DNS 162 DYNDNS wildcard 162 NAT 148 port binding 158 port forwarding 151 QoS 138 SSID 94 wireless LAN scheduling 101 WPS 97 address mapping types 155 administrator password 19 alternative subnet mask notation 251 antenna directional 276 gain 276 omni-directional 276 anti-probing 170 AP (access point) 266 applications, NAT 154 Asynchronous Transfer Mode, see ATM ATM 222 MBS 75, 79 PCR 74, 79 QoS 74, 79, 86 SCR 75, 79 status 222 authentication 104, 105 RADIUS server 105 automatic logout 20 B backup configuration 207 Basic Service Set, See BSS 264 Basic Service Set, see BSS broadcast 69 BSS 107, 264 example 107 C CA 189, 271 CBR 74, 79, 86 certificate factory default 190 Certificate Authority See CA. certificates 189 authentication 189 CA public key 189 replacing 190 storage space 190 trusted CAs 191 Certification Authority 189 Certification Authority. see CA certifications 290 notices 291 viewing 291 channel 266 interference 266 channel, wireless LAN 103 CLI 14 client list 119 Command Line Interface, see CLI compatibility, WDS 99 configuration backup 207 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 294 Index CWMP 200 DHCP 119 IP alias 121 IP precedence 143 IP/MAC filter 164 port forwarding 149 reset 208 restoring 208 static route 133, 135 WAN 69 wizard 28 connection nailed-up 84 copyright 290 CPE WAN Management Protocol, see CWMP CTS (Clear to Send) 267 customized services 176, 178 CWMP 200 activation 201 configuration 200 D data fragment threshold 101, 104 DDoS 169 default LAN IP address 19 default server address 152 default server, NAT 149 Denials of Service, see DoS DHCP 66, 116, 119, 128 diagnostic 221 DiffServ Code Point, see DSCP digital IDs 189 disclaimer 290 DMZ 152 DNS 116, 128, 217 documentation related 2 Domain Name System, see DNS DoS 169 three-way handshake 179 thresholds 170, 179, 180 DSCP 143 DSL connections, status 223 dynamic DNS 161 activation 162 wildcard 161 activation 162 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCP dynamic WEP key exchange 271 DYNDNS wildcard 161 activation 162 E EAP Authentication 270 encapsulation 68, 71, 78 ENET ENCAP 83 PPPoA 83 PPPoE 83 RFC 1483 83 encryption 106, 272 ENET ENCAP 71, 78, 83 ESS 265 Extended Service Set IDentification 89, 95 Extended Service Set, See ESS 265 F FCC interference statement 290 filters 163 IP/MAC 163 structure 163 IP/MAC filter configuration 164 MAC address 96, 105 URL 163 firewalls 168 actions 175 address types 176 anti-probing 170 customized services 176, 178 DDoS 169 default action 172 DoS 169 thresholds 170, 179, 180 ICMP 170 LAND attack 169 295 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide logs 175 P2P 180 packet direction 172 Ping of Death 169 rules 181 security 182 SYN attack 169 three-way handshake 179 triangle route 183 solutions 184 firmware 205 forwarding ports 148, 149 activation 151 configuration 149 example 149 rules 150 fragmentation threshold 101, 104, 267 FTP 14, 213 G Guide Quick Start 2 H hidden node 266 host 199 host name 65 I IANA 256 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority see IANA IBSS 264 ICMP 170, 217 IEEE 802.11g 268 IGA 153 IGMP 69, 118, 130 ILA 153 importing trusted CAs 191 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Index Independent Basic Service Set See IBSS 264 initialization vector (IV) 273 Inside Global Address, see IGA Inside Local Address, see ILA Internet Control Message Protocol, see ICMP Internet Protocol version 6, see IPv6 IP address 65, 69, 72, 78, 84, 116, 129 default 19 default server 149 ping 221 private 129 IP alias 120 configuration 121 NAT applications 155 IP precedence 143, 145 configuration 143 IP/MAC filter 163 configuration 164 structure 163 IPv6 277 addressing 277 EUI-64 279 global address 278 interface ID 279 link-local address 277 Neighbor Discovery Protocol 277 ping 277 prefix 277 prefix length 277 stateless autoconfiguration 279 unspecified address 278 L LAN 115 client list 119 DHCP 116, 119, 128 DNS 116, 128 IGMP 130 IP address 116, 117, 129 IP alias 120 configuration 121 MAC address 120 multicast 118, 130 RIP 130 296 Index subnet mask 116, 129 LAND attack 169 limitations wireless LAN 106 WPS 113 Local Area Network, see LAN login passwords 19 logout 20 automatic 20 logs 194 firewalls 175 M MAC 65 MAC address 96, 120 filter 96, 105 MAC authentication 96 Management Information Base (MIB) 215 managing the device using FTP. See FTP. mapping address types 155 Maximum Burst Size, see MBS Maximum Transmission Unit, see MTU MBS 75, 79, 85 MBSSID 107 Media Access Control, see MAC Address MLD proxy 74 model name 65 MTU 75, 80 multicast 69, 74, 118, 130 IGMPInternet Group Multicast Protocol, see IGMP Multiple BSS, see MBSSID multiplexing 71, 78, 83 LLC-based 84 VC-based 84 N nailed-up connection 73, 84 NAT 78, 147, 153, 154, 255 activation 148 address mapping types 155 applications 154 IP alias 155 default server IP address 149 example 154 global 153 IGA 153 ILA 153 inside 153 local 153 outside 153 P2P 148 port forwarding 148, 149 activation 151 configuration 149 example 149 rules 150 remote management 211 Network Address Translation see NAT Network Address Translation, see NAT network map 24 O other documentation 2 P P2P 148, 180 packet direction 172 Pairwise Master Key (PMK) 273, 274 passwords 19 PBC 108 PCR 74, 79, 85 Peak Cell Rate, see PCR PIN, WPS 109 example 110 Ping of Death 169 port binding 157 activation 158 297 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide summary screen 159 port forwarding 148, 149 activation 151 configuration 149 example 149 rules 150 PPPoA 71, 78, 83 PPPoE 71, 78, 83 preamble 101, 104 preamble mode 268 private IP address 129 probing, firewalls 170 product registration 291 PSK 273 push button 17 Push Button Configuration, see PBC push button, WPS 108 Q QoS 136 802.1p 145 activation 138 DSCP 143 example 136 IP precedence 143, 145 priority queue 146 Quality of Service, see QoS Quick Start Guide 2, 19 R RADIUS 269 message types 270 messages 270 shared secret key 270 RADIUS server 105 registration product 291 related documentation 2 remote management 210 DNS 217 FTP 213 Index ICMP 217 limitations 211 NAT 211 SSH 218 Telnet 213 WWW 211 reset 18, 208 restart 209 restoring configuration 208 RFC 1483 71, 78, 83 RFC 3164 194 RIP 74, 130 Routing Information Protocol, see RIP RTS (Request To Send) 267 threshold 266, 267 rules, port forwarding 150 S schedules wireless LAN 101 SCR 75, 79, 85 security network 182 wireless LAN 104 Security Parameter Index, see SPI Service Set 89, 95 setup DHCP 119 IP alias 121 IP precedenceQoS IP precedence 143 IP/MAC filter 164 port forwarding 149 static route 133, 135 WAN 69 wizard 28 shaping traffic 85 Simple Network Management Protocol, see SNMP SNMP 214 agents 215 Manager 215 managers 215 MIB 215 network components 215 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 298 Index versions 214 SPI 169 SSH 218 SSID 105 activation 94 MBSSID 107 static route 132 configuration 133, 135 example 132 status 63 ATM 222 DSL connections 223 WPS 98 subnet 249 subnet mask 116, 129, 250 subnetting 252 Sustain Cell Rate, see SCR SYN attack 169 syslog protocol 194 severity levels 194 system 202 firmware 205 passwords 19 reset 18 status 63 time 202 System Info 64 system name 65 T Telnet 213 three-way handshake 179 thresholds data fragment 101, 104 DoS 170, 179, 180 P2P 180 time 202 TR-069 14 trademarks 290 traffic shaping 85 example 85 triangle route 183 solutions 184 299 trusted CAs, and certificates 191 U UBR 74, 79, 86 unicast 69 Universal Plug and Play, see UPnP upgrading firmware 205 UPnP 121 cautions 117 NAT traversal 116 URL 163 URL filter URL 163 V VBR 86 VBR-nRT 74, 79, 86 VBR-RT 74, 79, 86 VCI 71, 78, 84 version firmware version 65 Virtual Channel Identifier, see VCI Virtual Path Identifier, see VPI VPI 71, 78, 84 W WAN 68 ATM QoS 74, 79, 86 encapsulation 68, 71, 78 IGMP 69 IP address 69, 72, 78, 84 mode 71, 78 MTU 75, 80 multicast 69, 74 multiplexing 71, 78, 83 nailed-up connection 73, 84 NAT 78 RIP 74 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide Index WPA-PSK 106 WPS 97, 108, 110 activation 97 example 111 limitations 113 PIN 109 push button 17, 108 status 98 wireless security 268 Wireless tutorial 38 wizard 27 configuration 28 wireless LAN 32 WLAN interference 266 security parameters 275 WPA 106, 272 key caching 273 pre-authentication 273 user authentication 273 vs WPA-PSK 273 wireless client supplicant 273 with RADIUS application example 274 WPA2 272 user authentication 273 vs WPA2-PSK 273 wireless client supplicant 273 with RADIUS application example 274 WPA2-Pre-Shared Key 272 WPA2-PSK 272, 273 application example 274 WPA-PSK 106, 272, 273 application example 274 WPS 97, 108, 110 activation 97 example 111 limitations 113 PIN 109 example 110 push button 17, 108 status 98 setup 69 traffic shaping 85 example 85 VCI 71, 78, 84 VPI 71, 78, 84 warranty 291 note 291 WDS 99, 108 compatibility 99 example 108 Web Configurator 19 web configurator 14 passwords 19 WEP 106 WEP Encryption 91, 92 WEP encryption 91 WEP key 91 Wide Area Network, see WAN WiFi Protected Access 272 WiFi Protected Setup, see WPS wireless client configuration 42 wireless client WPA supplicants 273 Wireless Distribution System, see WDS wireless LAN 87, 102 authentication 104, 105 BSS 107 example 107 channel 103 encryption 106 example 103 fragmentation threshold 101, 104 limitations 106 MAC address filter 96, 105 MBSSID 107 preamble 101, 104 RADIUS server 105 scheduling 101 security 104 SSID 105 activation 94 WDS 99, 108 compatibility 99 example 108 WEP 106 wizard 32 WPA 106 AMG1312-T Series Users Guide 300